The URL can be used to link to this page

PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDITIONS - 08-0064-PR-Cs CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORA�E ADDITIONS 08-0064-PR-C PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING RETAII:� MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS PREPARED FOR � 0 � � c� PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMEN�T ISSUED FOR BID SEPTEMBER/2012 °� . CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE , °��`„""� � THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED A3 A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS U�ON THE CERTiFICATE HOLI:>ER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE J�FFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELQW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AU'I'HORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER INIPORTANT. If the cenificate holder �a an ADDITIONAL IN3URED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WANED, subyject to the terms and conditions of �e policy, certaln policies may require an endorsement A sfatement on this certificate do� not confer ris�hts to the certiHcate holder in lieu of such andorsomonns►_ PRODUCER Nallace Welch & Willingham, Inc. 300 1st Ave. So., 5th Floor iaint Petersburg FL 33701 INSURED Certus Builders, Inc 304 S.Westland Avenue Tampa Fl. 33606 CERTBUI-01 � 1 INSURER F: I I COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 509927936 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLIC:Y PERI00 INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WI�ICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL TFIE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIM�TS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. �� TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER M UCY EPP M� Y EXP u�� A (iENERAL LIA81LfTY LP007515402 8/2012 /28/2013 EpCH OCCURRENCE 51,000,000 x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABIUTY PR MISES Ea occurrence 5100,000 CLAIMS-MADE a OCCUR MED EXP one pe�son 55,000 PERSONAL & ADV iNJURY 51,000 OIJO GENERAL AGGREGATE 52,000,000 GEN'L AC�C�REGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG 52,000 IX)0 POUCY PRa LOC s B AuTO��E un8n.m BA-2384R796-12-SEL �2�2072 /28/2013 Ea ecddenc 1�0 0()0 %� ANY AUTO BODILY �NJURY (Per person) $ UTOS�ED SCHOESULED BODILY INJURY (Peracddent) S NON-0WNED PPR�OPEe�DAMAGE s - HIRED AUTOS AUTOS S D UI�RELLA UAB X OCCUR BE052873823 /31/2012 /28/2013 EqCH OCCURRENCE $5,000,0f)0 x �� B CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE E5,000,0()0 DED RETENTION S $ C WORKERS COMPENSATION V008578802 8/2012 /28/2013 WC STATU- OTH- � AND EMP�OYERS' IIABIIRY Y/ N - ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE ❑ N lA E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICERfMEMBER EXCLUDED? (AAandNory M NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $1,000,0I)0 H yes, desaibe under ' �ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S1 000 O(10 DESCRIPTbN OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VENICLES (Atteeh ACORD 107. AddNbnat Ramarks Sd�edule, it more space b roqWrod) . The City of Clearwater is Additional Insured with respects to General Liability inGuding completed operations and Automobile Liability if required by written contrad. A Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Cleannrater applies to General Liability, Automobile Liabilit�r and orkers'Compensation if required by written contract. "`30 day notice of cancellation applies exaept for non-payment of premium whir.:h 10 days notice of cancellation applies. Pro�ect Name: Pier 60 Concession Building Storage Addition Pro�ect No.: 08-0064-PR-C City of Cleanivater 100 S Myrtle Ave #200 Clearvvater FL 33756 ACORD 25 (2010/OS) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLEI� BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIb�ERED IN ACCORQANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATNE ��'�'' C,� m 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rlght�� reserved. The ACORD name and logo are reglstered marks of ACORD + � AUDG�Nt?l��i�T ;�iU. 3 L)A"1'Ell: t)ct�ber l�.2p12 1 ' T£) TH� DRA�1'[NG� aI�ID PRO.)I.C�' �7ANi.lAL FOR: C[TY �F CLG.�RV1�`�TER Pf24JGC'T: CLEARWATER 13EACH —['[ER btl C(}�C'ES5iQN [3li[LDING STORrtC;E A�UITION & RLTAIL �ILC'Ft, R�NOVATiONS PROJ ECT NO. f�8-OU64-PR (C} D�TED: SE}'TENI�R,2012 1'12F.,PAI2EI� [3�': PARK�.4iVD RECREATtOt� UI;P.�R'T;4°iENT' PI�iSkfJ :1ttCFi1T'E�C"�`tiiti>, P.,1. EOQ 5. NIYRTLE ,��'G. �00 DREV4' STREE'I' CLTARIVATGR. ('LOfttll.� �z-; c. [��;.aftl��A1"ER, �"L(l�Rill.� 33^�5 PHC?�I E: 7�"-.r+G2-�$5#i �AX: 72"�Sb2-�8�5 .I"tii� AD�.EtVUUfi�l Nt`�. 3— QU�S't'lf)1V 6z Ai�S��i:�i i-�t)R PI�:R 60 CONC:`E,5SIpi� l3UtL�(NG 5'("£)ILAGE AUrIRf'1'10i� - NRUJECi NC>. OS-Of)G=1-PR (C� S�: RETAIL MEGH. RE?Vt7'4:4T14NS 4� THE CdNT`RaC'i' UOGLIMENTS t'C;wR TFII� ��'O[2K, TNIS ADDENDiJM Ct)NSTITUTES A PAR'1` �F� Tti�. CONT'RACI' D(3CC�hf�iV'T"S. At;KNaWLE�C;L I�t.EC'�,11'`�` QFTHES .A!)DE]VDGM ON'I'HE P[tOPnSAL FOR':Vl. PART I l'EiOJEC,T MANU.4L ttem No. i: Last da}� fi�r yuestionv is Octeber l5, ?l.�12 �i� l�:9t? Noon nt� oth�r qtiestic�ns �vil! be acce�?ted �r �nswereci af"te�r ti�z; r3�te atad ti��e ��ecitiezi. Questiun :"I'he door s�ec.iticatio►� �?�1€�f page =� oC-�, asks fc,r� az�i �icicl al(:er�ii�ite �� tu �-e�lace d«c�t�� 6, �� a��i� � i! ��Isa 1-eters tc� sheet Aa.3 a pa�� nat inefucied in bid docum�nt��. ! da �1at see ai� itet�� 0�1 biti tab�alatic�s7 s�k��t ic�r these �c��•�. Ar� ��e ta inctude this �iitern�tc �� 1�art ��f the bid'' Pleas4 ila��ify. A�►.�wer: "Clelete pa�a�rapt� 2.8 Alsern�te t?c�ur �jnc� }�rame Re�la�:ei»e�3t iT�cludin� stib �?aragraptis A, I3, and t_'. in Tec�l�nical S��ecific�tion Sect€c�n $l t10 Stee} L��t��-, �3nd �rames. t)ilors 6, 7_ an�i f� �re i��>t pai�t ��f this ��r<�j�ct�." ��vu o�� :ti�>z�x:��>u:�� c�. 3 A.DD�I�TllUM NO. 2 DATED: October 1 t, 2012 TO THE DRAWINGS A1�tD FRUJ�CT MANUAL FOR: CITY 4F CLEARWATER PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH — PIER 60 CONCESSI�iV BUILDING STORAGE ADDITiON & RETAIL MECH. RENOVATIONS PROJEC'F NO. 08-0064PR {C'� DATED: SEPTEMER, 2012 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT PLISKO ARCHITECTURE, P.A. 1.QQ S. MYRTLE AVE. 800 DREW STREET CLEARWATER, FLQR(DA 3375 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33755 PHONE: 727-562-4856 FAX: 727-56�4825 THIS ADDENDUM N0. 2—MANDTORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE MEETING MINUTES FOR PIER 60 C4NC:ESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDTION - PROJECT NO. 0&0064-PR (C) & RETAIL MECH. RENUVATIONS 1:)F THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THiS WORK, TN.[S ADDENDUM COIYSTITUTES A PART OF THE GOPVTRACT D�CUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECELPT O� THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PRQ�OSAL FORM. PART 1 PRUJECT 1VIANUAL Item No. l: Asbestos Report for ResEroom Concession Building -- The Owner is in the process of obta:ining the asbestos survey and any asbestos discovered will be handted by the Owner. The contractor will be required to file a lU day notice to the Putellas l'�onnty Air Quality Divisian prior to daing any demolition of the existing structure. Fees for the Pinellas Counry Air Quality Division witl need to be included in his bid price. The response from the Pineilas County Air Quality �ivision will be required when the successfui bidder is to obtain the building perrnit from the City of Clearwater Building Department lten� No. 2: Pre-Bid Meetiug Sign iu S6re! 1. 2 pages of the mandatory pre-bid sign ir� sheet Item No. 3: Mandatory Pre-Bid Conterence 1Vleefing Minufes -5 pages al! new revised notes, questions & answers are ;in the meeting minutes Item No. 5: Last day for qnestians is Octaber 15, 2012 at I2:00 Noon no ather questions w'r1E be accepted or answered ��fter the date aad time specified. END dF ADDENDUM NO. Z � 1 ; t ' , �_' ' � � ' � ' t ' u � � ' ' CITY OF CLEARWATER , Sign-in Sheet PiER 60 RESTROON.UC4NCESSIE3N BUILDTNG STt3:RA.GE ADDITION OS-OOb4-PR-C RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATIOlVS LER4Y CITIN , PROJECT MANAGER �3EACH Llr'EGUANll BU1Lll1N(� - 3 FLUUR CUNFERNCE itM. 180 GULFVIEVV BLVD, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 'FIIURSDAY, OCTpB�R 11, 2U11 - 10:4� AM SignAturc Company & Phonc #: E-Maii Address Tima: In City af Cleanvater LeTO� Chlll Parks & Rec. Dept. 727- lero�chin�a mYclearv�vater.com 10:�0 AM 562-4856 PlESko Architecture, P.A. alex lisko Alex Plisko AIA 727-461-0030 P� Ca�verizon.net IO:Otf AM �.� � i � � .f j �'� , � �c� S''( : r:.� � `i' � i3 . j �..� ►,a �...:.L � � �,a4 t�..�` � �*�,=1�' �' �}��'_`�" < c� r,. � � c �.c;l i � �'c �"1 � ..;t C"= ,� � `�" i � � `'�. i c'� t".E�. � : � .�, '`a ��.��__`t��"l� ��1�.%.��'` �t�-- ,�7�-�'��'-;��. �'i`�'.i r�G��%/Y-.i?�.c� �! . � ,_j J�-/`? ti ' �-��i� �.��i,t,)�;� `.; , �`" � ��i/�,�� ,� ��f� c1��F. � . ._ -� :`// C ��"//F�� - � c_� c'" �" � � ��`'7, -�c � ��..� �"G��'l, Yw,;, or�•=r'%i� , � ) 4% U;�� i '� � �=�� %Y �G�'L�':�,� �:- . �' � � >O � ' e( g ,�. � c��./.f- �(,'� !, t� G :� �t f � G: � � � � � � �':+.,..�.t � . �4 , j � •- � �� y�� / (�� 3 ) � 7 j ��7 � z- . � r, t �hB,I�.l�i ��^S1l/;! ��''�� 4�o�arei�i �-� �r✓ `j �Nt��/ > c'.' �at.� f�� ros�, 7r�c%%�., . tu� % S' r f� � . � . C . � - __c �� - � �. .- r . .- , . . . . . _ � � � ' t�k�` � , � ' � a, 1 �,: . � - � f�T fi. � f_ .. r,..:.t ; ` � . J � ( t�. ...i._ � __..-'i-.. ` � 4':� . .�f� f` 7 " -�/ Pre-bid Conf Sign-in sheet.xls � ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 1 CI l�J ' � ' ' ' , CITY OF CL�ARWATER Sign-in Sheet PIER 60 R�STR�4M/C4NCESSION BUILDING STO�RAGE AnD�TICaN a8-046�-PR-C RETAIL ME�HANICAL REII�tIUVA'FIUNS LER05� CHIN , PROJE CT MANAGER BEACH LIFEGUARD BUILDING - 3 FLOOR CONFERNCE RM. 1$0 GULFVIEW BLVD, CLEARWATER, FL4RIDA THITRSDAY, 4CTC�BER 11, 2011 -10:00 AM Signature Company & Phane t#: �-Mai{ Address Time In �/�, f� r�'� � E PG I � ('�, %"k� � t! � 1'" � � ca[%'r. j� �pL� /Q .0 ,� ` r....�-�"--�. ,� �C�� j rZ%� �/�= p� r't �T � , f/ r I � �c `t f;;l,l 1� E. �,.��G7' �t-'�� r� � -�C�� :'�' ff(„%f.,,j / U.L? • � �''4~v .. ��a� �.'S�l..9r:,- � ��'� C., ��1f��f C`' . � Pre-bid Conf Si n-in sheet.xls 9 ' L� ' ' ' LI , ' llate/Time: Pre-Bi� Conference Minutcs PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDiNG STORA.GE ADDITIOI�iS 08-0064-PR-C RETAIL MECHANICAL RENO�ATIONS October 1 l, 2011 @ 10;00 a.rn. Meeting Gocation. Clearwater Beach Li�e�uard Building 1$Q Gulfview Blvd. 3` Floor Clearwater, F1�ricla Cantacts: City of Clearwater Project Manager: Leroy Chin, Tele: 727-562-4856, E-maif: Leroy.chin@myclearwuter.com Consultants: Architect - Flisko Architecture P. A., AIA Alex Plisko Pier 6� Concessionaire: Steve Chandler 1. Segn-In Sheets - This is a mandatory mceting. Please camplete the sig�a-in sh�et legibly and co�rnpletely and legibly. Capies of the Pre-bid Conference sign-in sheet will 6e scanned and posted on the plc�n room website. 2. City's Plan room - Jiffy Reprographics 411 S. Garden Avenue, Clearwater, Florida {727) 445-I0:?�4 - any ' e-mails frorn the plan hause will be from noticc ,dcsi�,nbidbuitd.net, NOT the City of Clear�ater. It is the responsibility of the�rospective bidder to ensure that they have received all addendums. Please m��ke sure that Jiffy Reprographics has the eorrect contact name and email address for your compa�y. , ' ' � ' ' ' 3. If you have purch�sed plans throu�;h another plan house, please check on oe�r �website, ti�=��°��r.mv_cicarwater.com, ta ensure the receipt of any addenda infarmation. Brief Summary �cape of Work: (Detailed Scope of Work attached) The work for which proposats are invited consists of 2 Aarts: Part 1: Constructing a 44t� square f�nt st�rage aclditinns at Pier 60 concession buiiding ineludes sidewalk demolition, maso�iry, framing, roofing, mechanica[, electrical, and plumbinE;; together with necessary appurtenances. Part 2: Minor arct�itectucal i�iterior reiiuvations, mechenical and etectrical; ta�gether with necessary appurtenances. No bid bond ar performance bond �equired bidders must hold his bid prices for 9U day from date of bid opening. Part l: Concession Building Storage Additions funded by the City of Clearwater Part 2: Concession Buildirig Retail Mechanical Renovations funded by the Concessionaire. Part 1 and Part 2; Concession Building Storage Addition and Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovation are included in these bid dacuments. Thc intent is one Con�ractor is expeeted to perform the work for this project. Award of the contract wilf be based on th� iow bidder of tlte to�al addecl together to determine the low bidder. The Pier b0 Concessian Building is owned by the City of Clearwater and the Concessivnaire aperates the faeili!}r. The City of C(earwater wilt manage the construction project for the Concc:�sionaire atong with the Storage Building Additinn. Payment request for the f_'oncession Buiiding Retail Mechanicat Renovations shalt be separate pay request from the Storage Additian and processed separately. CONTRACT PERIOD: 75 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 4. Bid Proposat Forms -►tiust be complete. AII r�uantities and custs must be filled in. Please re-chtxck your ' tigures. 5. Proposal B�ond -'�c� i�iti ;��=r��I �. :-�°��:,.�°��. ' ' ' 6. Questions - Submit in ��riting via email with Subject Title noted as Pier 60 Concession Bldg. to Ler�y Chin, last day for questions regards to the project 12:00 Noon, Monday, Qctober I5, 2012 no ques�:ions affer date and �i�ne will be accepted ur answerea. All c}uestions must include Company Name, co ntact Pre-Bid Conference Minutes PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDITIC3NS 48-0064-PR-C RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATI�NS name, and email & phone number of contact person {in case clarificatio�� is needed). Responses subrnitted wiii be answered before o�� at tlie ta�t addendum issue clatc 5:00 PM, Mflnday, October 1S, 2012. 7. Contraet Awar� date is Thursctay, November IS, 2Q12 by City Council. 8. Contractor awarded the project shall cc,tlect cantraets from Engineering Dept. on Friday, November 16, 2Q1iG and has ten days to return signed contracts for City Cterk t� exece}te the contrarts_ 9. Pre-construction Meeting to be determine, contractor awarded contact wi11 be noti�ed. i 2_ Prospective 13idders Question & ConsultantlOwner Responses a. How �iiauy ctay� far th� canstruction �er�od? 7� c�t4€��ci.�s• cl��s t"�•€��r� ��i�e t�� r��cee��. b. What about contractor parki�� ep thc park.ing lot? �cc: �;c��,�a� c3f,3�,r•tc ite,�� =S c. What aboat parking tickets? r+ee sea�fe aCEw�oe-k iterit -� d. Where do em�loyees �s.t�•tc? �;�e �eo�� cff rvc�rk i tcs�c � e. Is the contractor required to fencing the work area'.> ge4� �r�;R�� t` E,%��r-� itert� ? f. Are we required to provide oar own sanitation? �'c� g. Do we need to pravide power and water? ��s (.)�vnc5t- �F i�l ��rc�vicl� u,�f�er ;�r�rl ��c►��cx►4 i 3. Comments: a} Consuttunt b) Plisko Architecture E'.A. —�(ex Plisko c) Owner —Parks & Recrcation Department — Leroy Chin i. Motion light switch shall bc standard wall light switch no motion switch is required in the ice creai�i shop. 2. The concession building tivill continue to be in ope�ation during the construction peciod there shall be no disruption of thc concessionaire's operation. a. The contractor shall consider doing all work in the ice cream shop area prior to demoti;shing the a/c system in this area. �. F'a�Ftticttt ii°t�tl� t�at C_'c.}��e•sic�nairc t�ar ['�i:-t ' o(� tllr E��-c>��ct. Ii7 fuftl�c:t i�iscu��io�� ~;iizi tl�r C'c�n�:i:�si€�tt�irt ;t' titL ��r�t��c,s<Yl is �tcie�,tahie li�� I�i-; �7c�rticz►� i31' tli� �irc��k, il�c. t'c�ne�ss�e.�s:ai,�c: �4ili tratt�tc�• f't»tci� t« t�3�• t.`itv° rt� periE>zrt� i'4irt ? f�f` t�ic ��::�r•n. "I�I�i� ��c��-tica�t c�t� t1�� «ck �;f��71I x?,� �r��.��3ic� �C�a�'afe,ll t<3 ke��? iit��iifr�� ;;i�.-��tr�`�te. -�. C'c�ntr��c� ��-itn ti��= ( c��c;�ssic�n�u�-e r.tiill l�e cietie:l�>E��! �L��a�°��tzi� <��7ci witl br: �?ic��icic: i�t ti�z� ,.:��i,tr°a�t si�t�itt� sta��:°. �. T_)i�c�;;siE?ns ��t?��.et t1z�� :t a�•:�t�}tci 11�c rat��;c f�r>�xl t,{ ,ii�: (�rieE .�rea e��ill t7r. a��luc_4ti�4C tt� t3t� �� +.ii;; ��.�11 c��er the 5��tk. �tr�: t; E�� -i�•ci�ite+�t sh��il cic��elt�4� ;: �.>-.� ;-".ilr,:�E4in� ti} att��:F��i tta� 1-+i�i;tli�,s.. =��r�,i:. d) Concessianaire — Steve Chandier 14. Tqur of constructian areas i 5. Adjoum Meerir�g Dctaitcd Scape of Work No bid bond or pet%rniance bond required bidders must hold his bid prices for 90 day from date of bid opening. 2. Confirnctor's qualifications: the Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience �f perf�rrning si�nilar tyne projects. If the contractor is prequali�ed wiEh Engineerin� De�t or has worked for the City of Clearwater F'a�rks and 2 Pre-Bid Canference Minutes PIER 60 CONCES�I4N BUILDING STURA,GE ADDITI�NS OS-0064-PR-C RETAIL MECHANiCAL RENQVATIDNS Recreation Dep�rtment previausly, the Contcactor shalE provide on his company tetterhead that he (las pei��formed a praJeet with the Parks 1nd Recrefltion Dept. If the vendor has nok worked for the Parks aitd Recreation De��k. he shail fiil out the attached qualification form, either typed or hand writte�t legibly and incfude five references for Cihe 4wner to verify the Contractor is capable �f performing the scope oFwork for this project. All blanks must be fitied: in and if there are any blanks not filled in on his qualification fc�rm, his bid proposal shatl be. fabeled as a non-respc�nsive bid and the bid sha(( not be reaiewed b�r the selection com�nittee. �. The Contractor shail be rcquire�t tc� c�tl�ccl ti�e building perniit for this wor[c. There is no fee for the permit from the City of Clearwater Bui(ding Dept. 1'he Owner app[ied for the bui(ding permit and will provide: thc informati.on ta the successful bidder to callect the building permit at the pre-construction meeting. 4. The Owner will provide 2 parking passes for the parkin� lot durin� the constniction of storage building additiott in the Pier 60 parking (at. Should the contractor's emptoyee's or his subcdntractor choases to parking in any rnetered spaces ��e wiil be required io place the parkin� stub on his dashboard. Any parking citation from the IE'arking Division is the responsibility of the vehicle owner and there wi�l be no waiver of the citations from the Owneir. 5. The Cantractor's employee vehicles parking working hours and storage of his equipment shall be parkedl in the grassy area southeast of the 8each Lifeguurd bui(ding flnd is design�ttcd confractor's par[cing. 6. The genera! contract�r cfiall cc�ordinate his deliveries af materiats to the site before 7:00 AM — t d AM, to minimize the disntptian of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aistes of the parking lot at anytime eluring the co��structiou perioa �f this �roject 7. It is reeommended the Contractor provide a temporary construction fencing around his 1ay down area dur•�ng tl�e duratian ofthis project. This area wili be identified during the pre-construction meeting. 8. '('he contractor shatl develop a list of materia! and shop drawings submittals and provide this list to the Owr�er at the pre-eonstruction meeting. 9. A[1 material and shap drawings submittais sh.all be submitted ta the architect within 30 days frorrt notice to proceed. 10. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing, material submittat, as-built drawings and shal! be m aintained by the contractor in separate fite boxes by specification sectians in file fo(ders cle�rly marked item contained i,n the file fotder and one CD af the electronic file of shop drawings anaterial submittals as built drawings and list of contrac;tors with contact information_ These doceiments shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as pact of the e[ose out materials. Also include a list of sub-con�raetors, materiat vendors and eIearly identify as to discipline witJi cantact information such as contact person, addresses, teiephonelceWfax numbers, and e-mai[ adclresses. 11. The successful bidder shal( be required to provide a detailed cons�c�uctio« scttc�iule �uilining al l work and minor a�nd major milestones for the project and shown (ang lead items af rnaterials delivery. This scL�edute shall be updatec� at each progress meating. This sehedule shail alsA be pcoviding at the pre-constructian nneeting as wel( as a list of sub-cc�ntraetors with contact �ers�n, addresses, telephonelcelUfax numbers, and e-mai[ addresses. i2. The contractor sha[i be required to do a tie in survey by a tic�nsed land surveyor and must be submitte:d to the buitding dept., Owner and Architect prior to the building addition going �vertical 13. Contraetor shall be rcquired to do an elevation certificate per F�MA requirei�ients and sliall be sub�niuc�i in two stages one when floor slab has been poured and other prior to applying for certificate af compietion from the ;Building Dept '1'he Uwner has attached the elevation certiFicate prior to beginning construction of storage building addrtion and is attached with these construction documents. Flevati�n certificates sha(I be submitted ta the build'eng dept. when perforrned by a licensed Iand surveyor. 14, All discrepa�cies between the construction ptans and the cechnical specifications shalt be broughc to the attcntion of the ArchitecdOwner for clarifieation in writi.ng priar to the Gencral Contractor in submitting his bid for thi�� project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the OwnerlArchitect the most stringea�t of the discrepancy shall be utiliz,ed in the implementatinn of the both parts of this project and no additiona! cam�ensation wilE be provided by the Ovi✓ner. , t5. The Contractor shal[ construct the project as shown oi� the contract drawings and specifications na deviations wil! be al(owed from the contraet drawings and spee�fications without prior approvat by the Owner/Architect. The Ccrntractor is responsible for any deviations requested and approved by the Owner/Architect And nny r�mifications bccau:sc of thc ' deviations requested by the contractor is his responsibility and no additionai funds wi(1 be provided. by the OwRedConcessianaire. Ct shall be ihe responsibility of the Contractor to make alf subm[ttats bu�tdin�:; pennit , ' ' ' ' ' , ' ' ' ' , ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Prc-Bid Cunference YIinutes 1'[EI2 6Q CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDIT�QNS 08-0064-PR-C RETAIL MECHANICAL RCNOVATIONS aniendments to the f3uilding Dept, to obtain fiital certificatian of completion to c(ose a��t the �roject and. buitding perm it. l6. The Cantractnr sha(1 nrovide one project signs as described in SECTEON III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. Site location of Ehe praject si�ns will be determined at the pre-construction meeting and shaIl be: installed by tl�e Cv��lractur one week upon notice Co proceed. Tl�e contractor shall provide hard eopy a� the projeet sign to tl�e Owner for approvai at th� pre-construction meeting for approval by the Owner. Project sign shall be provided at no additional cast to the �wner. 17. "I'he project has two parts: ParE 1- Concessioii Building Starage Addition funded by the City of Cleanvate�•;. Part 2— Concession Bui(ciing Retail Mechanical Renovations fimded by the concessionaire. Part i and Part 2; Cc,ncession Building Storage Addition and Concession f3uiiding Retai� Mechanica[ Renovation are included in 1:hese bid documents. The intent is one Co�ltractar is expeclea tv perfv�n lh� work for this project. Award of the con�traet will be based on ihe tow bidder of the tatal added together to deterntine the low bidder. IS_ 'Che concession building is owned by the City of Clearwater and the concessionaire operates the facility. Th�e Ciry of Clearw�ter will manage the construction project for the concessionaire alon� with the storage buildin� addition. Payment request for the Concession Building Retai( Mec�anical Renovations shal{ be separate pay request from the Storage Addition and processed separately. t9. PAYMENT WILL BE PEFORMED AS FOLLOWS FOR BOTH PROJECTS: At the preconstruction conference the Contractor shall pravide a schedule of value far ihe work, this schedule of value shalt br:, used to establish periodic payment for the work completed by the Contractor. Thc Contractor shal! invoice for rthe work compieted on the 25`h of eacfi month for the work compieted to date. The Contraetor shatl provide a prelimitxary draft of his payment request to the Owner/Architect and Concessionaire a week prior to the actual dae date af invoice for review. The invoice shall be on the Contractor's letterhead shnwinb invoice n��mher, the total valt�e of the: cantract (base value 4f Che contract less contingency) annonnt af payment request. No �rayment wil! be made for n•iore than work completed by Contractor. The OwnedArctiitect a�zd Caueessionaire wil! dclermine of amount wmpleted based an the schedule af vaEue and ttte physical wark completed on site. Deta'rl pa�ticulars of invaicing shall be w�arked out on the submission of the first two invoices and remaining invoice will foliow the same format. There wiil be a ten percent (10%} retainage ofthe contract value at each pay request and shall be reflected on each pay applicati�on of the amount retained. This re#ainage shatl be paid on final eiose out of the project ancf confirmation that the bullding per�nit has k7een clused aut and all work is completed to the Ow�zer/Architecz and Concessionaire's sati.sfaetion. Payment of invoice is twenty {20) days from the �wner/Concessionaire receiving the invoice for paymenl: request. Paymenfi wit! be mailed bJ� the United States Postal Service and na payrnent wilt be hand del'evered to the C��ntractor by the Owner or Concessionaire. 20. Red lined `As-built' drawings shatl be maintained on a clean set of p(ans notating and changes to the plans :and shail be check on a daily basis by the Owner/Architect. "t�hese `As-k3uilY drawings shaEl be turrred over to the owrier at the end of the project for his �les. 21. Pragress rneeting �vill be schedided every tw� weeks to update the Owner/ArchitecdConcessionaire at t0:Gi4 AM at the Beszch Lifcguard Buitding on a day selected by all parties at the pre-constructio�� n�eeting. Agenda ite�i�s to be discussed: sub contractors on site; progress for pass t�vo weeks, schedufe of upcoming two weeks, updated construction schedule, materia( submittal, shop drawings, �revious outstanding discussion items; pay reqe�ests and new items to be discussed at this rneeting incl�tding a project site visit. 22. Periodic daity inspections will be made by the Owner of the work and the Vendor shall have a responsible si.ipervisor on site at ail ti�ues during tlie c�aily ac;tiviliCS ihe! the Own�r can confer with abottt the progress and answer c�uesCions of fhe daily work activities. This person shalt be responsible for implementation of daiiy activities and have �c:omplete knawledge of the project scope of work, At a tninimum a progress meeting wili be held every two weeks bet��een the Vendor's project manager and the �wner to determine the past two weeks of «ork completed and progress for the upcoming next two week work schedule. This progress meeting wilt be prearranged for a day and tim�e at ttie preconsiruction meeting. A typed written b�llet nates sheet shali be provided to the Uw��er from the vendor sliowing work completed over the past two weeks and �vork scheduted for the next two weeks at each of these meetings, exchange of payment request applications shaU be performed at this pragress meeting. 23. Near tha completion oftha projeet, a w�►lk though of the project shall bc schcdulcd and conducted beCcvicen thr; Vendor and Owner to develop a punch list of outstaf�ding items which must be completed to close out the project. i�� written punch list will be provided by the Uwner. [ he Veiidor rr�ust complete the puncl7 tist witt�in 15 calendar day�s oE the �! [l ' Pre-$id Cunfe.ren�e Minut�;s PIER 6�} CONCESSION BUiLDING STORAGE ADDITIONS 08-0064-PR-C RETAIL MEC.HANICAL RENnVATLONS vendor reeeiving the tist from the Owner. ' 34. FinaE walk though sha[I be conducted between the Vendor and the Owner. If the punch list is compfctcd tk�c vcndor shaU Qrovide invoice for final payinent af any outstandin� items due to tl�e vendor and the #en percent (10%} retainage to the Qwnex for payrnent. ' ' u CI ' ' ' ' -, ' � � ' ' � 5 ' ' ' ' ' ' LI� ' , ' I_J ' � �J ' ' ' , ' ' ADDENDUM iYQ. 1 DATED: September 2b, 2012 TO TH� DRAWllVGS AIVD PRO.�ECT MANUAL FOR: CITY f3F CLEARWAT�R PROJECT: CLEARWAT�R BEACH — PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDITIONS PRUJECT NO. 08-0064-PR (C� +CLEARV4'ATER BEACH —FIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVA7'it�NS DATED: June, 2411 PREPAR�Ti BY: PARKS AIVD RECREAT[ON DEPARTMENT FLISKU ARCNITECTURE, P.A. AIA 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. $04 DREVN STREET GLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 CLEARWATER, FL�RIDA 33755 FHONE: 727-562-4856 FAX: 727-562-4825 THIS ADDENDUM NO. 1 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, MANDATORY PRE-BtD MEETING DATE PIER 60 CUNG'ESS10N SU[LD[NG REMODEL - PR03ECT NO. U8-QOG4-PR-C OF THE CONTRACT DQCUMENTS FOR THIS WORIC, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACI�N�WLEDGE RECEIPT f)F 'THIS ADDENDUM C)N THE PROPOSAL FURM. PART I PRUJECT MANUAL Item IVo. 1: SECTION i— ADVERTISEMENT 4F BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTURS — i page l. Mt�ndatory Pro-Bid Mccting is Thursday, Octobcr 11, 2012 at ] 0:00 AM -- Bcac6 Li%guArd Station — 100 Galfview �1vd. — Clearwater, FL 33767 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 ' , ' ' AD�ENDUM NO. 1 Sept. 26, 2012 - SECTI�N 1 ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & N�TICE TO CONTRACTORS PIER 60 COI�ICESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDITIONS PIER 60 CONESSION l3Ull,llING I�'TAll, M�GHANICAL ltk;Nf)VA`i'lUNS PR4JECT NO. 08-0064PR-C CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this ProjecY are a�ailable for inspection andlor purct�ase by pras.;pective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: �ti-ww.in}�Ctean�ater.comlci�r�rojects, �N Mondav, ' �ctaber, 1, 2012, «ntil no later than clase of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Ci:�ntract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproducEion cost only. �� ' LJ l__J The work for which proposals are invited consists of z Parts: Part t: Constructing a�400 square foot storage additions al: Pier 60 concession building includes sidewalk demolition, masonry, framing, roofing, mechanical, eiectrical, and plumbing; togetl��er with necessary appurtenances. Part 2: Minc�v architecn�ral interinr ren�vati�nc, mechanic�l and electrical; ta�ether with n�:cessary appurtenances. No bid bond or perfor►nance bond req�ired bidders must hold his bid prices for 9Q day from date af bid openi�E;. Part 1: Concessian Building Storage Additions funded by the City of C�earwater Part 2: Concession Buildinf; Retail Mechanical Renavations funded by the Concessionaire. Part 1 and Part 2; Concession Building Storage Addition and Coticession Building Retail Mechanical Renovation are included in these bid dacuments. The intent is one Cantractor is expected to ;�erform the tivork for this project. Awazd af the contract wil} be based on the low bidder of the total added tagether to determine the lo�v biddec The Pier 60 Concession Building is owned by the City of Clearwater and the Concessionaire operates the facilily. The City af Ctearwater wilt manage the construction project far fhe Goncessionaire alang wiEh tibe Starage Building A��ldition. Payment request far the Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renavations shall be separate pay request frorn the Storage Addition and processed separ�teIy. Mandatory Pre-8id Conference for aIl gros�ective brdders will be held on 10:00 AM, Thursday, Uctober 11, 2(112 ' at Beach R.i%guard Station, 3"' Floor Con�erence Rm. location 18Q Guliview Bivd. Ctearwater, FL 33767 Representatives of the Own�er and Cousuiting Engineer will be pt�esent ta discass this Project ' ' � ' � � � Sea[ed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Nianager, at the Purchasi�g 41%ce, tocated at the M�nic'rp�l Services B1dg.,100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3`� Ftoor, Clearwater, Florida 337S6-5S20, until �:30 P.M. on Fridav, U�ctober, 19. 2412, and publicly opened and read at that hour and pface for Part 1-PiEer 68 Coneession Buildint �"toragg Addition — Pra�ect No. 08-Q064-PR-C, Part 2— Pier b0 Concession Building Retail Meehanical Renavations. A comptete bidders package contairiing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is avaitable to the general publfc (Confractors, Sub-cantractors, suppliexs, vendors, etc.) for review and purehase. However, sealed proposal4 will only be aceepted from those Contractors th$t are currentty City pr�qt�alified Contractors, has previously contracted with I'arks a4z Recreatiaa Department or has a minirnuxn of 5 years experience in similar the construction category of commercial huilding with a minisnum pre-quali�cation or similar si�e �raject in the �monnt of $100,000.00. Contractars WSllttp� YO PI'C-tjU�I� t8 bid this project must da by filling out attachment in bid p.roposal referencing af iive (5) references with project name, value oi pruject, contact person, address, phone num�rer, fax number and e-maii address subrnifted along wit6 bid proposal on the 6id opening date. No bid bond is required; eontractor musE haid liis bid for a minimum of ninety days from date of bi�i opening. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida ta reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager (727)562-4633 ' AddcdnduniNo. 1 ScctianI[t].doc ' Pa�e 1 trC! ', �23t2012 ' ADDENDUM NQ. t ' DATED: September 26, 2012 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MA.fdUAl. FOR: ' ' ' � ' CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: CLEARWAT�R BEACH — PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE AaDITIONS PRUJECT NO. 08-0064-PR (C) CLEARWATER BEACH —PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOYATIONS DATED: ,Iune, 202I PR�PAI22ED BY: PARKS AND RECREATiON DEPARTMENT PLISKO ARCNITECTURE, P.A. AIA 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. $00 DREW STREET CLEARWATER, FL4RiDA 3375 CLEARWATER, FLURIDA 33755 PHONE: 727-562-4856 FAX: 727-562-4825 THIS ADDENDUM NO. 1 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING DATE PIER 60 CONC'ESSIUN BUILD.[NG REMODEL - PRQ.�EGT NQ. 08-OQG4-PR-C QF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FQR THIS WORI�, THIS ADDENDUM CUN5i'ITUTES A PART �� 7'HE CONTRACC DOCUMENTS. ACKNaWLEDGE RECEIPT UF THIS ADDENDUM UN THE PROPQSAL FORM, ' PART i PR(?JEGT MANUAL Item 1No. 1: SECTION I—ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTURS-1 page 1. Matndatory Prc-Bid Mccting is Thursday, Octobcr I 1, 2012 at 10:40 AM — Scach Lifcgua.rd 8tation — l0U Gulfiricw :131vd. — ' Clearwater, FL 33767 END OF ADDENDUM N0. 1 � , 1 � � ' � I l �I � ' , l � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � _� � City of Clearwater, Florida PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDITIONS PROJECT NO.: OS-0064-PR-C PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATION'� SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION IV SECTION IV SECTION V TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTR.ACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS EXISTING CONDITION ELEVATION CERTIFICATE REFERENCE FORM ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - STORAGE ADDTIONS ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - RETAIL MECHA.NICAL RENOVATIONS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS � � � SECTION 1 ADVERTtSEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS PIER 60 CONCESSION BUII.DING STORAGE ADDITIONS PIER 60 CONESSION BUII�DING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR-C CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospe�,tive � bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.mvClearwater.com/cityprojects, ON Morndav, October. 1. 2012, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Con�ract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. � l_� The work for which proposals are invited consists of 2 Parts: Part 1: Constructing a 400 square foot storage additions at Piier 60 concession building includes sidewalk demolition, masonry, framing, roofing, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing; together with necessary appurtenances. Part 2: Minor azchitectural interior renovations, mechanical and elechical; together with nece;ssary appurtenances. No bid bond or perfonnance bond reyuired bidders must hold his bid prices for 90 day from date of bid opening. Part 1: Concession Building Storage Additions funded by the City of Clearwater Part 2: Concession Building ]tetail Mechanical Renovations funded by the Concessionaire. Part I and Part 2; Concession Building Storage Addition and Conce;;sion Building Retail Mechanical Renovation are included in these bid documents. The intent is one Contractor is expected to perform the work for this project. Award of the contract will be based on the low bidder of the total added together to determine thr:: low bidder. The Pier 60 Concession Building is owned by the City of Clearwater and the Concessionaire operates the facility. The City of Clearwater will manage the construction project for the Concessionaire along with the Storage Building Add�tion. Payment request for the Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovations shall be separate pay request from the Stc>rage Addition and processed separately. � Mandatory Pr�Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on 14:00 AM, Thursday, October 12, 2012 at Beac6 Lifeguard Station, 3'� Floor Conference Rm. location 180 Gulfview Blvd. Clearwater, FL 3:3767 Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Projec� � � � �� Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services B1dg.,100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3'� Floor, Clearwater, Florida 3375(�5520, unti11:30 P.M. on Fridav. Oct��ber, 19. 2012, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for Part 1-Pier 6Q Concession Building Stura�e Addition — Proiect No. 08-0064-PR-C, Part 2— Pier 60 Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovations. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purc.lhase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors, has previously contracted with Parks & Recreation Department or has a minimum of 5 q�ears experience in similar the construction category of commercial building with a minimum pre-qualification or similar size project in the amount of $104,000.00. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid tlus project must do by filling out attachment in bid pro�wsal referencing of five (S7 references with project name, value of project, contact person, address, phone numbe�, fax number and e-mail address submitted along with bid proposal on the bid opening date. No bid bond is required; contractor must hold his bid for a minimum of ninety days from date of bid opening. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Pwchasing Manager (727) 562-4633 � Sectionl[1].doc � Page 1 of 1 7/23l2012 � � � �� SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS ..........................................................................1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ..................................................................................1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 CONTRACTTIME .......................................................................................................... 3 LIQUIDATEDDAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL .AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 SUBMISSIONOF BIDS ...........» ..................................................................................... 4 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 OPEl�TING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ......................:.................... 5 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE .............................6 18 AWARD OF CONTRAC'I' ................. ... .. .................................... ................................. 7 19 BID PROTEST ............................. 7 20 TRENCH SA.FETY ACT ................................................................................................. 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENTMEASURES ....................................................................................... 9 � SectionII[1].doc � 8 4/3/2012 n � � Section II — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS � 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: wwwmyclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, �' which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, ai��Fidavits and bid/proposal form is available orily to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a � possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a"Subcontractor" � package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. � 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for enors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. � 13 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. � 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS �� , � � 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perfonn the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre-Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: wwwmvclearwater.com/ og v/depts/pwa/engin/Construction/prequal.as�. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or fizrnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefiilly correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical SectionIl[I].doc Page 1 of 9 4/3/2012 Sectioa II — Instrvctions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in e�cisting structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Quesrions received after the time frame specified at the pre-bid meeting prior to the date for opening of Sectionll[t].doc Page 2 of 9 4/3l2012 � � � � 4.2 5 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Orily information pmvided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's m�imum Bid price and in the form of �' a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting � the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. ,� � � � 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and fiunish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90} days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14} days after the Bid opening. 5.3 6 6.1 7 7.1 8 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. CONTRACT TIME The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awazded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so � requested, shall, within seven (� days after the date of the reyuest, submit to ihe Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the � SectionlI[l].doc l� Page 3 of 9 4/3l2012 9.2 Section Ii — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shail not exceed fifty percent (50%} of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, reguest the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organi�ation listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Ageement as provided in the General Conditions. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcantractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 'The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposai Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on atl items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shail be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or parmership shail produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title sha11 appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 11 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. SUBMISSlON OF B1DS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and Sectionll[1].doc Page 4 of 9 4/3/2012 � � � IJ � �� J � � LJ ' � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Section II — Instructions to Bidders addressed to the CiTy of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount witl be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13 _ 1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Crrounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or atl bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 16 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor sha11 secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as � specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees � SectionII[l ].doc � Page 5 of 9 4/32Q12 Section II — Instroctions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specificatly stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 163 The Contractar shall pay a11 applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by Iaw. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent Sta.te Statutes involving the sales ta�c and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which aze equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the awazd process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or a11 of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate contauung the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawfizl manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days a#�er such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. SectionIl[1].doc Page 6 of 9 � � � � � � � � � � 4/3/2012 � j � � Section II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. � Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. � � � � � � 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A pmtest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such pmtest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to awazd of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite � SecdonII[I].doc � Page 7 of 9 4/3/20I2 Section II — Instructions to Bidders specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5).day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exceprion. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the pmtestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5} work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, atong with copies of his✓her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the finat authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee sha11 not exceed $2,540 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. SectionII[I }.doc Page 8 of 9 4/3/2012 � � � LJ Section lI — Instructions to Bidders 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subpazagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTI�N SITE EROSION AND SEDtMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES � 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protecrion Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater � management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. � � � L1�� A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at Citv of Clearwater En in� eering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EPA website � SectionII[I].doc � Page 9 of 9 4l32012 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFIl�TITIONS ..................................................................................................................1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THEPROJECT ...............................................................................•-•-............................. 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6 3 CONTRACT DOCiJMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7 3.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7 4 5 6 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCEPOINTS .................................................................................................... 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 8 43 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 9 BONDSAND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 9 5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATIONINSURANCE .................................................•-...... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10 S. 2. 3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY ..................... ............................... 11 5.3 WANER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 12 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES .....................................................................12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERIN`I'ENDENCE .............................................................12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTI'I'iJTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS .................................................. 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES•• ....................................................................................................15 6.5.1 STAGINGAItEAS ..................................�-�•-----..._.....................................................15 6. S. 2 RESTORATION TIME LIMI7'S ................................................................................ 1 S 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ...................................16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ......................................................................................16 6.8 PERMITS .......................................................................................................................17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION .....................................................................................17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ...................................................................................................:........18 6.11 DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................18 SectionlII.doc i 7/31/2012 ri 8 E 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUB]IIIT7'AL REVIEW ........................ 18 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 19 6.11.3 CADSTANDARDS ..................................................................................................21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :........................................................................................�----.......23 6.12 CONTRACTOR`S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION ......................................... 24 OTHERWORK .............................................................................................................. 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24 7.2 COORDFNATION .........................................................................................................25 9.I 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 10 11 12 13 14 OWNERSRESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 OWNERS REPRESENTA"I'IVE ................................................................................... 25 CLARIFICATIONS AND IN"I'ERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 26 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 26 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 26 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 27 CHANGESIN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 28 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ..............•..................................................... 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTR.ACT PRICE ADNSTMENT ....................... 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 30 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 14.1 14.2 143 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 CHA.NGES IN THE CONTRAC'I' TIME .................................................................... 31 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OFDEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31 TESTS AND INSPECTION ......................................................................... UNCOVERING THE WORK .................................................. OUVNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK.. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ... WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ................................. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK .............................. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK .................. ................. ................. ................ 31 ................ 32 ................ 32 ................ 33 ......•••-...... 33 ................................. 33 ................................. 34 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 35 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35 PARTIALUTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 36 FINALINSPECTION ................................................................................................... 37 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 37 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37 WANEROF CLAIMS ...................................................................•............................. 38 Sectionlll.dce ii 7/31/ZOl2 ' � � � � L' � � � � �� 15 16 17 15.1 15.2 15.3 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 18 19 24 21 22 22.1 22.2 23 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 23.8 24 25 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 38 OWNER MAI' TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 40 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 4Q MISCELLANEOUS....................................................................................................... 40 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40 GIVINGNOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40 NOTICEOF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 41 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 41 ASSIGNMENTOF CONTR.ACT ................................................................................. 41 RENEWAL OPTION ............................................................ 41 ........................................ ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41 MATERIALUSED ......................................................................................................... 41 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 42 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 42 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 42 EXAMPLE............................................................................................... ...................... 42 PROJECTINFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43 SCOPEAND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 43 FIXEDSIGN ................................................................................................................. 44 PORTABLESIGNS ...................................................................................................... 44 SIGNCOLORING ......................................................................................................... 44 SIGNPLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44 SIGNMAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 44 TYPICALPROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 45 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARA,NTEE .................. 45 SCRUTINIZED COMPA1vIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CER'TIFICATION FORM ..................................................................... 46 � SectionIII.doc � iii 7l31/2012 � � Section III — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS � Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, conect or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. � Agent � Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment � The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments arid which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. � � Approve The word appxove is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. � Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, insiructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). � Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. � Lj lJ � Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure ihe Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager � The person who is typically in responsible chazge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the � Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regazding SectionIll.doc Page 1 of49 7/31/2012 � Section III — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement} when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entezed into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater ox its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standazd, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer T'he duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent SectionIlI.doc Page 2 of 49 1 � � � � , LJ �I � � � � � � 7/31/2012 � � LI � � � � Cl � � � Section III — General Conditions professional associate or consuitant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "fiunish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone � A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. �� i � � � � � � � Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SectionIlI.doc Page 3 of 49 7/3Il2012 Section III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom sha11 be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of ihe pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifcally prepazed by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Speciftcations Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereo� which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's defnitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier Surety A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, disiributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Any person, finm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SectionIIl.doc Page 4 of 49 I� �J � � � � � � � � � i � � i 7/31/20I2 � � � LI � � Section III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work � The entire completed construction or the various sepazately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as , required by the Contract Documents. � � � � � l� J Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELtVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF iNSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insvrance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1} copy Qf Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJ�ECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor � shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. � � 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and a11 applicable SectionIII.doc Page 5 of 49 7/3120t2 Section III — General Conditio�s field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, enor or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, enor or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CP1V� Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. SectionIII.doc Page 6 of 49 7/31/2012 � � � � �� L� � C � � � � � Section IlI — General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT � 3.1 iNTENT The Contract Documents comprise the enrire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor � concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereofl to be � constracted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- � known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. � Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, � manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by � reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract � Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and � enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. � 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or � discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor � shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General � Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, enor, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. � � Sectionlll.doc Page 7 of 49 7/3l/2012 1� n Section III — General Conditions AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILlTY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATfONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports aze not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer fmds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDfTIONS, �UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer sha11 not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating a11 Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICAT'ION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. SectionIII.doc Page 8 of 49 7l31/2012 � � � l _� � � L� � � � � � � �� ' � � r � � I' �I , � � � � � � � � � � Section III — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum chazge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one yea,r after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Opezations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declaxed bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such Iiability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and fumishing of the Work and Contractor`s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Suppliez, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or fuinish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily SectionFII.doc Page 9 of 49 7l3I/2012 Section III — General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personat injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directIy or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii} include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two yeazs after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATiON INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,040,040. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2} Emplayer's Liability $SOQ,000. $1,OOO,Q00. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Coliapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Coniractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Sectionlll_doc Page 10 of 49 7/3I/2012 ' � � � l _J � � � � � � � � � � � � t � � � � i � � � � � � � � Section III — General Conditions Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,00O,OOQ. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $504,000. Each Accident $1,OQ0,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contra.ctor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or Types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full covera.ge from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lon�shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer sha11 be liable for and sha11 secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of com.pensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. � SectionIII.doc Page 1 t of 49 7/3 t/2012 Section III — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective of�icers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILtT1ES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contactecl whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed SectionlIl.doc Page 12 of 49 7/3l/2012 � � � , � � � � � �� l � L�.' � � � C� �� J � r � � � � I� � � Section III — General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspeetor overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUtPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at alt times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and a11 other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that iheir quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and � conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to � be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Oprion, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Cleazwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. � � Sectionlll.doc Page l3 of 49 7/31 /2012 � Section IiI — Generai Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or materiat or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an"or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable tirne to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLtERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or fumishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subconiractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or fiunishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or fumishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contra.ctor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. SectionIII.doc Page 14 of 49 7/31/2012 �� I� � �J � , � � � � � � � � �J , � lJ , � L� � � � �� , � � � Section III — General Conditions All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom 4wner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine consiruction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas perrnitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against 4wner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. � During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, � rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. �� 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LiMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10} consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. SectionIIl.doc Page ] 5 of 49 7/31/2022 Section III — General Conditions All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the perFormance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor sha11 pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings aze in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State fiinding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-Q2 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E-Verify System to verify employment eligibility. SectionIII.doc Page 16 of 49 ?/3l/2012 , � � � � � � � � � � � � ' � � � � LJ � � ' � ' , � � r 1� � � � �i � Section lII — General Conditions 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor sha11 pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids.. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and sha11 provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor sha11 provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor sha11 require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazazdous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmfiil substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such tr�c due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having � jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when � ' SectionIII.doc Page 17 of 49 7/3l/20I2 Section 111— General Conditions prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or fumish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFts, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, speciiied performance and design criteria, materials and similaz data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfed Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Sectionlll.doc Page 18 of49 7/31/20I2 � � � � � � �' � � , � L_� �J � � � ' � � � � � � � � u �� ' � IJ Section 11I — General Conditions Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, seqnences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the reyuired number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from � responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written ' notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Coniractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. � Contractor sha11 fiunish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a � number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backchazge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of fust time submittals shall be equal ta the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and � Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items reyuiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work � completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond ihe control of Contractor. , 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order � and legibie condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, � inciuding revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not � SectionlII.doc Page 19 of 49 7/31/2012 � Section IIi — General Conditions indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compiiance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an"AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter SJ-17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. SJ-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated.• also knomv as Record Survey. This survey sha11 be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and sha11 be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the projec� If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back chazge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of speciai construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain} All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation} based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction SectionIlI.doc Page 2Q of 49 7/3l/20] 2 , � � � � � ' � � � r � � , � � � � � , � ' , � r , , � LJ � �_ � � � �J � � � , U Section III — General Conditions plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of I988. The unit of ineasurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter SJ-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have nninimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefx denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefx denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — nse for all text, no matter the prefix SectionlIl.doc Page 21 of 49 7/31/2012 6. Section IiI — General Conditions 11.3.1.2 La er Namin Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRNE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks uther layers may be created as required, usmg above tormat. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standazd AutoCAD colors, bylayer. SectionIII.doc Page 22 of 49 7/31/2012 � ' � , ' Seciion III — General Conditions All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .014 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=24' unless , approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable fle formats include: DWG, of a shape file. , ' C�i � CJ , � � � �1 � , l J' � Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mal�ony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahonvna�nyClearwater.com. 6.'!2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modifcation or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and caze of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of imal acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or fmal payment by Owner's Representative, (iii} the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. SectionIII.dx Page 23 of 49 7/31l2012 Section Ill — General Conditions 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold hannless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or azbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible properly (other than the work itsel fl, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer ar any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed ta the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utiliiy owners for these purposes. � ' � u , ' , L_1 � LJ , ' �� ' � CJ SectionIII.doc Page 24 of 49 7/31/Zp12 � � ' ' 'J � , ' , ' � , ' L__J � � , ' Section III — General Conditions The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii} the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementazy Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required ofthe Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they aze due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. 'The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods; techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or fiunish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE , Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during ' construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. ' � SectionlIl.doc Page 25 of 49 7/3I /2012 Section 111— General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such rvritten clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this pazagraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within si�y (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such c}aim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (3�) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's Sectionlll.doc Page 26 of 49 7/3I/2022 ' , ' � , � ' C _� � ' CJ � � ' , ' , ' � u ' ' � � � , ' ' � l.J L_J � , ' ' ' �� LJ' ' Section lII — Generat Conditions written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other marier will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMiTATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and appmvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. SectionIII.doc Page 27 of 49 7/31l2012 Section III — Generai Conditions 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an e�ctension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be ad}usted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) SectionIII.doc Page 28 of 49 7/31/2Q12 LJ ' u �i LJI'� ' �' ' ' CI ' � � ' L_�I ' � I� � ' ' � � i ' ' � ' Section lll — General Conditions after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data. shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. 'The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual ' payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor ta�ces established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2 LJ , ' fl L� ' 4_ , Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. , A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). �� , Sectionlll.doc B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shail be added to the costs of Item 2 above. Page 29 of 49 7/31 /2012 Section III — General Conditions C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable ta agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. L JI �i � u � � ' � , ' � ' ' � ' L�' ' SectionlIl.doc Page 30 of 49 7/31/2012 ' � ' , � ' u u � ' ' 1 � � ' � , ' � � ' Section III — General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occunence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Coniractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. T'he costs for these SectionIII.doc Page 3l of 49 7/31 /2012 Section Ill — General Condi4ions inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereo� specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay a11 costs in connection iherewith, ana furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others} that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragaph sha11 be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Convactor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones}, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATtVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been SectionIll.doc Page 32 of 49 7/31/2012 ' ' , � �I L � � ' � lI � ' ' r � ' II � ' IL_� �I � � � ' � Section III — General Conditions eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this pazagraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If requued by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting frorn such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may ' be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in � accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of 1 others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement , (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. � , �� ' � In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of a11 the Work, the correction period for that item may start�to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of fnal payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree SectionIll.doc Page 33 of 49 7/31 /2012 Section III — Genera! Conditions as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs a8er the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECT{VE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Docwnents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which aze stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incoiporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will orily be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and SectionlII.doc Page 34 of 49 , J � � � � � L__J ' ' � � � 7/312012 ' � ' � � � Section III — General Conditions acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all qUantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. � In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have � been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. � � � ' � � � � � � 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work sha11 be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner hazmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incuned in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligatians upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20} business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. SectionlII.doc Page 35 of 49 7/31l2012 Section III — General Conditioas In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring conection or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by ar�endment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTlLIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i} has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of a11 the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. SecdonIIl.doc Page 36 of 49 7/31/2012 i � � � � � ,� � � � � � � �� i � � ' � , � � � L� � �� ' � Section 111— General Conditions 14.5 FINAL {NSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a imal punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5} days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as aze necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all snch corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-builtlRecord Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for fnal payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the sureTy, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may fumish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisiied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may fnrnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's �nal Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the batance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been fumished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and � SectionilI.aoc � Page 3'I of 49 �/31l20i 2 Section III — General Conditions accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and fmal inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90} days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this SectionlII.doc Page 38 of 49 7/31/2012 ' ' l__� � � � � � � � � � � r � � �� Section III — General Conditions Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which aze stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. � If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by � Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this pazagraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. � � � � Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liabiliTy. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate ihe Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services � and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; � for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of ternunated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. ! Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. � � SectionIlI.doc 1 Page 39 of 49 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor fmm making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESQLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. , � � i � � � �� LJ � � SectionIIl.doc Page 40 of 49 7/31/2012 � � � ' � Section III — General Conditions 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such in}ury or damage. 'The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substittzte for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in , each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. � � �J � � � � � 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals sha11 be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers andlor dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: ('72'� 562-4923 or email: Michael.Pr,�(a�mYClearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. � SectionlIl.doc � Page 4] of 49 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifcations, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the hidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of constxuction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE l.l - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, unless stated otherwise in ihe Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption andlor colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification sha11 be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-%4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities sha11 mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after buszness hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL SectionIII.doc Page 42 of 49 '7/31/2012 � � � �� i � � � i � � i � Section 111— General Conditions Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE e are the construction contractor performing (state rype of contract) for the City of Clearwater your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. us notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property rners of the pending start of construction. I� �(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standazd asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public � funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active � work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1— SCOPE DESCRIPTION. � � ' 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type sha11 be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be deternzined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. SectionIlI.doc Page 43 of 44 7{31/2012 Section III — Genera} Conditions 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign sha11 be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2} 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign sha11 be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic bamcade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 S1GN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the pmject site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAtNTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionIII.doc Page 44 of 49 7/3l/2012 � � � � � � � 1 � � l _� � �� u � � Section III — General Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN r� �� PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT TIUMBER) �DEPARTMENT NAME} PROJECT N CONTR.ACTOR: � COMPLETION DATE: t � .� r E E .� N \ FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: u = � � o, , � �� : ��water ��: � / 2'— 3„ 4"x4" P.T. Post (Typ.) 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE � It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions_ It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.2 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the SectionIlI.doc Page 45 of 49 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.Q0) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of fmal acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cnba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): SectionlII.doc 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3_ The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. Page 46 of 49 �J � ' � � � � � I�� L� i � r � 7l31/2�12 � � � , � �i � Section III — General Conditions 4. 'The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scnrtinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 20I2. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Cleazwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal � plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. � � � � � ' � � � � , �l � Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($l,OQ0,400.04) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City reta.ins the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. SectionIII.doc Page 47 of 49 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANTES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real properly, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. SectionIlI.doc Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity/Corporation Page 48 of 49 � L_J � � � � � �_ � � � � � � � � � , 7l31 f2012 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � i � � 1 i 1 � Section III — General Conditions STATE OF COUNTY OF The foregoing instnunent was acknowledged before me on this � day of , 201_, by (name of person whose signahzre is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who didldid not take an oath. NOTARYSEAL ABOVE SectionlII.doc Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: Page 49 of 49 7/31/2012 � , r SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: ' SECTION IV ................................................. ' ................................................................................. i TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i � � � � � � � � , � � ' � � ' 1 �a 3 4 5 6 7 8 SCOPEOF WORK ...........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 3 FIELDENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 5 2.1 LINE AND GRA.DE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 5 2.1.1 GRADES, LINESANDLEYELS ............................................................................. S 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ....................................................................................................... 5 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. S DEFINITIONOF TERMS ............................................................................................... 5 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 6 3.2 A.BBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 6 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 7 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 7 7.1 7.2 8.1 CONCRETE...................................................................................................................... 8 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 9 EXCAVATION................................................................................................................ 9 FORMS........................................................................................................................... 9 REINFORCEMENT......................................................................................................... 9 BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 9 9 OBSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................9 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS ANDSTREET PAVEMENT ..........................................................................................10 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................10 12 13 DEWATERING................................................................................................................11 12.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................11 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREIv1ENTS .........................................................................................11 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ....................................................................................11 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITEACTIYI7'Y ............................11 SA1�IITARY MANHOLES ..............................................................................................14 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 14 13.2 PRECAST TYPE ..........................................................................................................14 SectionIV.doc ; snsiaoi2 13. 2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) .................. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES .......................................................................:....... 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS .............................................................•---..... 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS ........................................................................ 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ....................................................... 14 15 16 16.1 17 17.1 17.2 18 18.1 18.2 19 19.1 19.2 193 .........-•--------...15 ...................... 15 ...................... 15 ...................... 15 ......................15 BACKFILL......................................................................................................................15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC . .......................................................................................16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ ] 6 BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................16 BASISOF MEASUREMENT ......................................................................................16 BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16 UNDERDRAINS.............................................................................................................16 BASISOF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 17 BASISOF PAYMENT .................................................................................................17 STORMSEWERS ..........................................................................................................17 ASBUILT INFORMATION .........................................................................................17 TESTING......................................................................................................................18 BASIS OF PAYMENT 18 . ................................................................................................. ZO SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ..............................................................18 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................18 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 18 20.1.2 FORCEMAINPIPE .............................................................................................19 20.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................19 20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................19 20.2.2 FORCE MAINPIPE .........................�---.........._..........--•-----..........-----�---�---------...... 19 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ...............................................................................................19 20.4 TESTING ......................................................................................................................20 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVI7'YSEWER�S' ........................................................................ 20 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 20 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..............................................................................................•-- 20 20.5.1 GR.�VITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 20 20.5.2 FORCEMAINPIPE ..............................................................................�---........__.20 21 DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................21 22 RO.A.DWAY BASE AND SUSGRADE .......................................................................... 21 22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 21 22.1. I BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 22 22.1. 2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................. ..... ....... .. 22 22.2 SUBGRADE......-• .........................................................................................................23 22.2.1 BASIS OFMEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 23 22. 2. 2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 23 SectionN.doc �1 5/15/2012 � �' � � � � � � ' , � IJ ' 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ...................................................................23 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 23 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................23 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 23 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES — PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 24 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 24 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 24 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 25 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ....................................... .... 26 ................... 23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................26 23.6.2 POTHOLES ..........................................................................................................26 23.7 ADJiJSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 26 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 27 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ...................................................................• 27 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 28 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 28 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 28 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 29 25.1 IRRIGATION ..............................................................................•-•--............................. 29 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................29 25.1.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................30 25.1.3 EXECUTION ......................................................�•-•---��---.._......._............................34 25.2 LANDSCAPE ..........................................•••••.........................•••............................---.....38 25.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................38 25.2.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................43 � S 2 3 EXECUTION 46 � 26 � , � � � � � 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 26.8 26.9 27 27.1 27.2 28 29 29.1 29.2 . . ......................................................................................................... HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 53 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 53 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 53 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 53 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARA'TION ................................................................... 54 TELEVISION 1NSPECTION ....................................................................................... 54 LINER 1NSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 54 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 55 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 55 PAYM EN T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 55 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 55 BASISOF PAYMENT ...........................................................................................•..... 55 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 56 CONCRETECURBS ................................................................•-•-•--.............................. 56 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 56 BASIS OF PA'YIvIENT ................................................................................................. 56 SectionIV.doc »; snsnoi2 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ..........:.............................................. 56 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 31 32 33 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS......... CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ........ BASIS OF MEASUREMENT..... BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................... � ......................................... 56 ......................................... 56 ......................................... 57 ......................................... 57 SODDING........................................................................................................................ 57 SEEDING......................................................................................................................... 57 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 58 33.1 BiJILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 58 33.2 PRECASTTYPE ..................................................................... ..................58 ................... 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 59 34 35 36 37 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 59 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 59 STREETSIGNS .............................................................................................................. 59 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 59 37.1 37.2 37.3 37.4 37.5 37.6 37.7 37.8 37.9 37.10 37.11 37.12 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 59 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 59 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 59 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................... 59 RECORDED 1NFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 60 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 60 VIEWERORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 60 LIGHTING................................................................................................................... 60 SPEEDOF TR.AVEL .................................................................................................... 60 VIDEOLOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 61 AREAOF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 61 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 61 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 61 38.1 38.2 38.3 38.4 38.5 38.6 38.7 38.8 38.9 38_ l0 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 61 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 6l PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 61 SEDIMENT TR.APPING MEASURES .............................••-•---.................................... 62 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 62 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 62 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 62 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION .......................... ................. 63 MAINT'ENANCE ......................................................................................................... 63 COMPLIANCE ........................... . . . ............................ .................. .... .. . ..... . .................. .. 63 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 66 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 66 SectionlV.doc iv 5/15/2012 � � � � � � � , r � ' �� , ' , �� J , � , � � ' � � lJ � � � � , � �� u ' , 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES....................................................................................................... 66 41.1 SCOPE ..........................................................................................................................66 41.2 MA'I'ERIALS ................................................................................................................ 67 41.2.1 GENERAL ...............................................................�--...........................................67 41.2.2 PIPEMATERIALSANDFI7TINGS .............................•---.--.................._......_.......67 41.2.3 GATE YALVES .....................................................................................�--�----......... 69 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 69 41.2.5 HYDRANTS .....................................................................................•---��--�---..........70 41.2.6 SERYICESADDLES .............................................................................................71 41.2. 7 TESTS, INSPECTIDN AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 71 41.2.8 BACKFZOWPREYENTERS ................................................................................71 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 72 41.2.10 BLOWOFFHYDRANTS ......................................................................................72 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................72 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 72 41.3.2 PIPE.LAYING .......................................................................•---•-�-�--.....................72 41. 3.3 SETTING OF YALVES, HYDRANTS AND FI777NGS ......................................... 74 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 74 41.4 T'ESTS ...........................................................................................................................75 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 75 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 75 41.5 STERILIZATION ...............................................................................75 .......................... 41.5.1 STERILIZINGAGENT ..........................................................................................75 41.5.2 FL USHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 75 41.5.3 STERILIZ.4TIONPROCEDURE .................•------..._....----..........-------.--..................75 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TES�'5 ........................................................................... 76 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 76 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 76 41.6.1 GENERAL .............................................................. ............76 41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 77 41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FI77'INGS ................................................................... 77 41.6.4 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITHBOXESAND COVERS..................................................................•---.......................................... 77 41. 6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 77 42 GAS SYS'I'EM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 78 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... ?8 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... ?8 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ..................................................... .. 78 ...................................... 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 78 43.1. 3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 78 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ............................................................................................ 78 43.1.5 SURFACECOURSE .............................................................................................78 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 79 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ............................................................................................ 84 43.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................80 43.2.2 SITEPREPARATIDN ............................................................................................81 SectionN.doc v snsr�o�z 43.2.3 43.2.4 43.2.5 43.2.6 43.2. 7 43.2.8 43.2.9 43.2.10 43.2.11 43.2.12 43.2.13 43.2.14 43.2.1 S 43.2.16 43.2.17 SLOPE..----• ............................................................ BASE CONSTRUCTION ....................................... PERIMETER CURBING ....................................... SURFACE COURSE ............................................. ROOTBARRIER ......................................�--•---�--•-- FENCING............................................................. WI ND S C R E E NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COURT EQUIPMEIV'1 .......................................... SHADE STRUCTURE ........................................... WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................. CONCR E TE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING. WATER COOLER .................................................. DEMONSTRATION .................................... .................................... .............................. . .. . .. .................................... ............................................................................ WARR�4 N7�' ..... . .............. ............... ...... ... .. . ........... . ......... ......... . .. .. .. . . ... ............ 81 ............ 82 ._.......... 82 ............ 82 ............ 82 ............ 83 ............ 83 ._.......... 83 ............ 85 ............ 85 ............ 85 ............ 85 ............ 86 ............ 86 ............ 86 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 8? 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 87 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 87 44.2.1 WORKZONESAFETY .................. . 87 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 88 44.3.1 ALLROADWAYS ..................................................................................................88 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 88 44. 3. 3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ........................................................ . 88 44.3.4 MAJORARTERIALS_..---�-•--•--�----� .........................................................................88 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 88 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TR.AFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 89 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 89 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 89 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LIl�TING .............................................................................. 89 45.1 45.2 45.3 45.4 45.5 45.6 45.7 45.8 45.9 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 89 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 90 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 94 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 90 TELEVISION 1NSPECTION ....................................................................................... 91 L1NER1NSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 91 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 91 TIlV1E OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 91 PAYMENT..... ... ..... ............................ ............................... ................ ............................ 91 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYI,ENE SLIPLI1vING » ............................»..... 92 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 92 46.1.1 PIPEAND FI'1'77NGS ........................................................................................... 92 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL ...... ..................................................................................... 92 46.1.3 SAMPLES ..............................................................................................................92 46.1.4 REJECTION .. .....................................................................................................92 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 92 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRA.CTICES ................................................................................. 93 SectionIV.doc vi 5/15l2012 � �I � � ' � � r , � � � , � � , , �I � I L� � r , ' � I_J � ' � � � � � � �� ' 4 4 4 46.3.1 HANDLING OFPIPE ..................................�----......................_............................. 93 46.3.2 REPAIR OFDAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 93 46.3.3 PIPEJOINING......- ..........................�----....._.........................................................93 46.3.4 HANDLING OFFUSED PIPE ...........................�---............_..............---................ 93 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................ 93 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTSAND DIMENSIDNS ...................................................... 93 46.4.2 CLEANINGANDINSPECTION ...........................................................................93 46. 4. 3 INSERTION SHAF7'AND E.YCAYA770NS .......................................................... 94 46 4.4 INSERTION OF TNE LINER .............................�------........................--�--------�-------- 94 46. 4. S CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 94 46.4.6 IJNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IFREQUIRED ................................................ 94 46.4.7 BACKFILLING .....................................................................................................95 46. 4. 8 POIN7' REPAIR ........... .......................................................................................... 95 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................... 95 7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 95 47.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 95 47.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 95 47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 95 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 96 47.5 FI'I'T'INGS .....................................................................................................................96 8 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 96 48.1 PRESSURE 1NJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 96 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 96 48.3 COMPOSI'I'ION ........................................................................................................... 96 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 97 48.5 MATERIALS ...................................................•-........................................................... 97 48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 97 48.'7 REINFORCE1vIENT ...................................................................•-••..............................97 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 97 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 98 48.10 PROPORTIONING .......................................................................................................98 48.11 MIXING ........................................................................................................................98 48.12 APPLICA'I'ION .............................................................................................................98 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JO1NT5 ......................................................................................... 99 48.14 SURFACE FINISH......--•• ............................................................................................. 99 48.15 CURING ..........--•-• .....................................................................99 _...-•••••• ........................ 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 99 48.17 1NSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 100 48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 100 9 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .........................101 49.1 SCOPE AND 1NTENT ...............................................................................................101 49.2 PAYMENT ..................................................................................................................101 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ..........................................................................101 49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................101 49.3.2 INS'TALLA770NAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 102 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 102 SectionIV.doc vii 5/15/2012 49.4.1 MATERIALS ................................................•--._................._....---.....................--•-- 103 49.5 1NFILTRATION CONTROL ......................................................................................103 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 143 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 103 49.8 WATER .......................................................................................................................104 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 104 49.10 EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 104 49.1 l INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 104 49.11.1 PREP,4RATION ...................................................................................................104 49.11.2 MIXING ...............................................................................................................1OS 49.11. 3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 105 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 1OS 49.11.5 CURING ..............................................................................................................105 49.11. 6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 106 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 106 49.12.1 SCOPE ............................................................:................................................... 106 49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................106 49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 108 50 51 52 53 54 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................110 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................11Q 51.1 SCOPE .........................................................................................................................110 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ......................................................................................111 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................... .111 51.2.2 CONCRETE .........................................................................................................111 51.2.3 COURTPATCHBINDERMIX ............................................................................111 513 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ..........................................................111 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE ...........................................................112 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .....................................................................................112 51.6 PLAYING LINES ........................................................................................................112 51.7 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................112 51.8 LIMITATIONS .............................................................................................................112 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................113 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................113 53.1 MATERIAL ............................................................................. 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MA7TRESS MATERIAL ............... 53.1. 2 GABION AND MA77'RESS FILLER MATERIAL: ........... 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ............................................................ 53.1. 4 GEOTF.YTILE FABRIC .................................................... 53 2 PERFORMANCE . ..........................................•••....---...-•••...._...................... ..................113 ..................113 .................. Il S ..................116 ..................116 ..................116 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................117 54.1 SCOPE ...................................................... 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ...................... 54.3 WORK METHODS .................................. 54. 3.1 MAIIVTENANCE SCHED ULING ..... 54.3.2 DU77ES PER SERVICE VISIT ......... SectionlV.doc viii ...................................................................117 ...................................................................117 ...................................................................118 ..............................................•---•--..........._..118 ...................................................................118 5/IS/2012 � � ' l� ' ' ' , , � ' �� ' ' � ' CJ � fJ � � ' ' ' � � ' � � � � ' � ' ' 54.4 LITTER .........................................................................••-••..........................................118 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ........................................................................................................118 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ...........................................................118 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)......118 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ...................................................................................................118 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................................................119 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY .............................................................................................119 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION ...........................................................................................119 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED A.REA ...............................................•••••......119 54.13 NI[.TLCH CONDITION ..................................... 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .....................................................................119 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::.:::::::119 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ...................................... 119 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 120 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 120 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 120 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 120 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 120 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ...........................................................................................121 55.1 55.2 55.3 55.4 55.5 55.6 55.7 55.8 55.9 55.10 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ......................................121 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIKENIENTS .......................................................... 121 SALUAGEABLE MA"I'ERIALS ................................................................................. 122 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 122 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROLJND UTILITIES .................. 122 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 122 TYPESOF MILLING ................................................................................................ 122 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 123 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 123 BASISOF PAYMENT ...............................................................................................123 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... ]23 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................ ........................... 123 ........................... 123 57 RIPRAP .........................................................................................................................123 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 123 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 124 58 TREA'I'MENT PLANT SAFE'I'I' ................................................................................124 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 124 58.2 REQUIIZED CONTRACTORTRAINING ................................................................ 124 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ...........................................124 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYIVIENT .......................................................125 60 SIGl�1I1vG AND MARi�TNG .........................................................................................125 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 125 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................125 se��o�v.ao� � snsiaoi2 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 125 62 TREE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................126 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ...........................•-...........................................................•-•..... 126 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 126 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING .......................................................•--•--...................._.._... 127 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES ..............................................................................................128 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ...............................................................................................128 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 128 63.3 'I`HE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE .......................................................128 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ...........................................................................................129 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 129 63.6 POSTING ....................................................................................................................129 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDA1'ES ............................................................................................ 129 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ......................................................129 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 129 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEAR.ANCE DISTANCES .............................................129 SectionlV.doc x 5/l5/2012 I � � � 1 f _] ' � � � ' � , i , � � � u � � � , 1.1 Section IV — Technical Specifications SCOPE OF WORK SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project: Part I: PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDTTION PROJECT NO. 0&0064-PR-C Part 2: PIER 60 CONESSION BUII.,DING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS Scope of Work: I. The work for which proposals consists of 2 parts: Part 1: Constructing a 400 square foot storage addition at Pier 60 concession building includes sidewalk demolition, masonry, framing, roofing, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing; together with necessary appurtenances_ Part 2: Minor architectural interior renovations, mechanical and electrical; together with necessary appurtenances. 2. No bid bond or performance bond required bidders must hold his bid prices for 90 day from date of bid opening. 3. Contractor's qualifications: the Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience of performing similar type projects. If the contractor is prequalified with Engineering Dept or has worked for the City of Cleazwater Parks and Recreation Department previously, the Contractor shall provide on his campany letterhead that he has performed a project with the Parks and Recreation Dept. If the vendor has not worked for the Parks and Recreation Dept. he shall fill out the attached qualification form, either typed or hand written legibly and include five references for the Owner to verify the Contractor is capable of perfomung the scope of work for this project. All blanks must be filled in and if there are any blanks not filled in on his qualification form, his bid proposal shall be labeled as a non-responsive bid and the bid shall not be reviewed by the selection committee. 4. 'The Contractor shall be requued to collect the building permit for this work. There is no fee for the permit from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. The Owner applied for the building permit and will provide the information to the successful bidder to collect the building permit at the pre-construction meeting. 5. The Owner will provide 2 parking passes for the parking lot during the construction of storage building addition in the Pier 60 parking lot. Should the contractor's employee's or his subcontractor chooses to parking in any metered spaces he will be required to place the parking stob on his dashboard. Any parking citation from the Parking Division is the responsibility of the vehicle owner and there will be no waiver of the citations from the Owner. 6. The Contractor's employee vehicles parking working hours and storage of his equipment shall be parked in the grassy area southeast of the Beach Lifeguard building and is designated contractor's parking. 7. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before '7:00 AM —10 AM, to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the cons�uction period of this project 8. It is recommended the Contractor provide a temporary construction fencing around his lay down area during the duration ofthis project. This area will be identified during the pre-consuvction meeting. 9. The contractor shall develop a list of material and shop drawings submittals and provide this list to the Owner at the pre-construction meeting. 10. All material and shop drawings submittals shall be submitted to the architect within 30 days from notice to proceed. 11. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing, material submittal, as-built drawings and shall be maintained by the contractor in sepazate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder and one CD of the electronic file of shop drawings material submittals as built drawings and list of contractors with contact informarion. These documents shall be tum over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. ALso include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, �dresses, telephone%elUfax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 12. The successfiil bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construetion schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre- SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 128 5l15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. I3. The contractor shall be reyuued to do a tie in survey by a licensed land surveyor and must be submitted to the building dept., Owner and Architect prior to the building addition going vertical 14. Conh-actor shall be required to do an elevation certificate per FEMA requuements and shall be submitted in two stages one when floor slab has been poured and other prior to applying for certificate of completion from the Building Dept. The Owner has attached the elevation certificate prior to beginning construction of storage building addition and is attached with these construction documents. Elevation certificates shali be submitted to the building dept. when performed by a licensed land surveyor. 15. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be hrought to the attention of the Architect/Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner/Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be ntilized in the implementation of the both parts of this project and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. 16. The Contractor shall construct the project as shown on the contract drawings and specifications no deviations will be allowed from the contract drawings and specifications without prior approvai by the Owner/Architect. The Contractor is responsible for any deviations requested and approved by the Owner/Architect and any ramifications because of the deviations requested by the contractor is his responsibility and no additional funds will be provided by the Owner/Concessionaire. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make all submittals building permit amendments to the Building Dept. to obtain final certification of completion to close out the project and building permit. 17. The Contractor shall provide one project signs as described in SECTION III, ART'ICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. Site Iocation of the project signs will be determined at the pre-construction meeting and shall be installed by the Contractor one week upon notice to proceed. The contractor shali provide hard copy of the project sign to the Owner for approval at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Owner. Project sign shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 18. The project has two parts: Part 1- Concession Building Storage Addition funded by the City of Clearwater; Part 2— Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovations funded by the concessionaire. Part 1 and Part 2; Concession Building Storage Addirion and Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovation are included in these bid dceuments. The intent is one Contractor is expected to perform the work for this project. Awazd of the contract will be based on the low bidder of the total added together to detercnine the low bidder. 19. The concession building is owned by the City of Clearwater and the concessionaire operates the facility. The City of Clearwater will manage the construction project for the concessionaire along with the storage building addition. Payment request for the Concession Building Retail Mechanical Renovations shall be separate pay request from the Storage Addition and processed sepazately. 20. PAYMENT WILL BE PEFORMED AS FOLLOWS FOR BOTH PROJECTS: At the preconstruction conference the Contractor shall provide a schedule of value for the work, this schedule of value shall be used to establish periodic payment for the work completed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall invoice for the work completed on the 25�' of each month for the work completed to date. The Contractor shall provide a preliminary draft of his payment request to the Owner/Architect and Concessionaire a week prior to the actual due date of invoice for review. The invoice shall be on the Contractor's letterhead showing invoice number, the total value of the contract (base value of the contract less contingency) amount of payment request. No payment will be made for more than work completed by Contractor. The Owner/Architect and Concessionaire will determine of amount completed based on the schedule of value and the physical work completed on site_ Detail particulars of invoicing shall be worked out on the submission of the first two invoices and remainirtg invoice will follow the same format. There will be a ten percent (10%) retainage of the contract value at each pay request and shall be reflected on each pay application of the amount retained. This retainage shall be paid on final close out of the project and confumation that the building permit has been closed out and all work is completed to the Owner/Architect and Concessionaire's satisfaction Payment of invoice is twenty (20) days from the Owner/Concessionaire receiving the invoice for payment request. Payment will be mailed by the United States Postal Service and no payment will be hand delivered to the Contractor by the Owner or Concessionaire. 21. Red lined `As-built' drawings shall be maintained on a clean set of plans notating and changes to the plans and shall be check on a daily basis by the Owner/Architect. These `As-BuilY drawings shall be turned over to the owner at the end of the project for his files. SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 128 5/15l2012 � � � � � r � ' L.J � , � � , � ' � � ' ' ' �' C'� �� ' r , 22. 23 24. 25. Section IV — Technical Specifications Progress meeting will be scheduled every two weeks to update the Owner/ArchitecdConcessionaire at ] 0:00 AM at the Beach Lifeguard Building on a day selected by all parties at the pre-construction meeting. Agenda items to be discussed: sulz contractors on site; progess for pass two weeks, schedule of upcoming two weeks, updated construction schedule, material submittal, shop drawings, previous outstanding discussion items; pay requests and new items to be discussed at this meeting including a project site visit. Periodic daily inspections wiil be made by the Owner of the work and the Vendor shall have a responsible supervisor on site at all times dwing the daily activities that the Owner can confer with about the progress and answer questions of the daily work activities. This person shall be responsible for implementation of daily activities and have complete knowledge of the project scope of work. At a minimum a progress meeting will be held every two weeks between the Vendor's project manager and the Owner to determine the past two weeks of work completed and progress for the upcoming next two week work schedule. This progress meeting will be prearranged for a day and time at the preconstruction meeting. A typed written bullet notes sheet shall be provided to the Owner from the vendor showing work completed over the past two weeks and work scheduled for the next two weeks at each of these meetings, exchange of payment request applications shall be performed at this progress meeting. Near the completion of the project, a walk though of the project shall be scheduled and conducted between the Vendor and Owner to develop a punch list of outstanding items which must be completed to close out the project. A written punch list will be provided by the Owner. The Vendor must complete the punch list within 15 calendar days of the vendor receiving the list from the Owner. Final walk though shall be conducted between the Vendor and the Owner. If the punch list is completed the vendor shall provide invoice for fmal payment of any outstanding items due to the vendor and the ten percent (10%) retainage to the Owner for payment. CONTRACT PERIOD: 75 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS ' 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST � u , ��1 � � ' � Project: Part 1: PIER 60 CONCESSION BiJILDING STORAGE ADDITION PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR-C Part 2: PIER 60 CONESSION BUII.DING RETAII, MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "C✓("as shown below: 1 0 Sco e Of Work 2.1 � Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Ci 3 0 Definition Of Terms 4 0 Order And Location Of The Work 5 Q Excavation For Under ound Work 6 U Concrete 7 0 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 � Reinforcement 9 � Obstructions 10 ❑ Restoration Or Re lacement Of Drivewa s, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 0 Dewaterin 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 0 Backfill 15 Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 � Unsuitable Material Removal 18 Underdrains ' SectionIV.doc Page 3 of l28 5/ISl2012 ' Section IV — Technicat Specifications 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 ❑ Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 ❑ As haltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Ad'ustment To The Unit Bid Price For As halt 25 ❑ General Plantin S ecifications 26 ❑ Hd Deformed - Reformed Pi e Linin 27 ❑ Plant Mix Drivewa s 28 ❑ Re rtin Of Tonna e Of Rec cled Materials 29 ❑ Concrete Curbs 30 0 Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s 31 ❑ Soddin 32 ❑ Seedin 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 Q Conflict Between Plans And S ecifications 36 ❑ Street Signs 37 Q Audio/Video Recordin Of Work Areas 38 L( Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utili Tie In Location Markin 40 C✓( Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and A urtenances 42 ❑ Gas System S ecifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured-In-Place Pi e Linin 46 ❑ S cifications for Pol ethylene Sli Iinin 47 S cifications for Pol 'nyI Chloride Ribbed Pi 48 ❑ Gunite S ecifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhoie Liner Restoration 50 0 Pro'ect Information Si s 51 ❑ In-Line Skatin Surfacin S stem 52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance S cifications 55 Millin O erations 56 � Clearin and Grubbin 57 ❑ Ri ra 58 ❑ Treatrnent Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Si al E ui ment and Materials 60 ❑ Si ing And Markin 61 ❑ Roadwa Li htin 62 ❑ Tree Protection • 63 ❑ Pro'ect Web Pages 64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance , ��, ' C , r r C1 , ' ' ' � �1 � ' n u SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 128 5/IS/2012 , , , , � 2 2.1 Section IV — Technical Specifications F1ELD ENGINEERING LtNE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR , The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the , work. Also included aze such Engineering services as are specified or reyuired to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- ' built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. � I ' ' t � ' � ' � ' � , ' 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical eontrol points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for aligrunent only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use caze not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DQTA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated SectionlV _doc Page 5 of 128 5/15l2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREViATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: se�Uonlv.aoc AA AAMA AASHTO ACI AISI AMA AMCA ANSI APA ASAE ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWG AWMA AWS AWWA CFR CISPI CRSI CS DEP DOT EPA FAC FBC FFPC FGC FMC FPC FedSpec HI Aluminum Association, Inc. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Of£icials American Concrete Institute American Iron and Steel Institute Acoustical Materials Association Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. American National Standards Institute American Plywood Association American Society of Agricultural Engineers American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineering A.merican Society for Testing and Materials American Wire Gauge Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association American Welding Society American Water Works Association Code of Federal Regulations Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Connmercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) Department of Transportation (Florida} Environmental Protection Agency Florida Administrative Code Florida Building Code Florida Fire Prevention Code Florida Gas Code Florida Mechanical Code Florida Plumbing Code Federal Specifications Standards of Hydraulic Institute Page 6 of 128 5/15/2012 ' � u ' ' , ' [1 ' ' ' ' � � � u L� , ' C� i C � , r---, I� � �--- �� ' � � , ' � C� ' ' � ' � ' Section IV — Technical Specifications IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA NFPA NPT NWMA PCA PCI SBC SBCCI SDI SFPC SGC SJI SMACCNA SMC SPC SPIB SSPC TCA UL National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association National Pipe Thread National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Standard Building Code (SBCCI) Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. Steel Door Institute Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Steel Structures Painting Council Title Council of America Undervvriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a maiu�er which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both pubiic and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is cailed to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removat of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications a"Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepazed by ihe contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (140) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in adva.nce of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the gade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less ihan 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as � J r--, �� ' i ' �-, I � ' , I' � ' ' � ' ' r � � SectionlV.doc Page 8 of 228 5/IS/2012 � , CJ 1 � � Section IV —Technical Specifications determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 7.1 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon ' which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the �'��. � � jl ' � 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT , When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the ' requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A49'�. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. , � � ' , ' ' 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor sha11 consult Inspector for the approved means. ' SectionN.doc ' Page 9 of 128 5l15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be Iimited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK lN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time sha11 be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- ' � � � LJ � ' � ' ' ' � , � '� il�i ��J '� SectionN.doc Page ]0 of 128 5/15/2012 ' , ^-, '� � ' I�� Section N — Technical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the ' dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. � Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and � the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. � � ' ' T'he Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUtREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for � the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced goundwater from any construction site, the contractor must ' collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... � 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED S1TE ACTIVITY , �� Cit�Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification � It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the Ciiy at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA � SectionlV.doc Page 11 of 128 5/15/2012 ' Section IV — Technical Specifications DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DtSCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before dischazge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The e#�luent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631 E 0.a12 µg/1 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mgll 5.6 µg/I Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µgll Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/1 Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µgll 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the dischazge is not authorized by this permit or by the Cit�ofClearrvater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table l, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC SectionIV.dce Page 12 of 128 5/15/2012 ' ` I � � , I' � � � � , ' � , �l r� ��, � , , ' , LI �� , � � ' ' � , ' ' � �� Section 1V —Technical Specifications requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude}; 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Dischazge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above nahual background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of tlus section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/1. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. 1 If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed � activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during 1 SectionN.doc Page l3 of 128 5115l2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in d'uection of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standazd Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches: Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper conshuction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components aze delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop enhy, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #3U2 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. u � �i J � � � ' � , � � � � � SectionIV.doc Page 14 of l28 5/152412 � � ' � ' � Section IV — Technical Specifications Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring � shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section N, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. ' � � �� , � ' , � 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with U2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a I S mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214-351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP-R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for. backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources � as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hazd fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. � Backfill placed around pipes sha11 be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. I Backfill under all types of paving sha11 be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill sha11 be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. ' SectionIV.doc Page IS of 128 5/15/2012 ' Section IV — Technical Specifications Backfill outside of pavement areas sha11 be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill sha11 be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of a11 such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation sha11 be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BAS1S OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material sha11 be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor sha11 construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A#57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate ma.y be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe sha11 be 8" SectionlV.doc Page 16 of 128 5/15/2012 , � � � i � � � � ' � � � � �I ' ' �� ' Section IV — Technical Specifications diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-�58 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. � Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and madways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. AI} poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall � be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. � 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' � � � � � � � � , � Measurement shall be the nwnber of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. '18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. '19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints sha11 be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is fottnd in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in whieh they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to fmd that ihe inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream SectionlV.doc Page 17 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by flling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the inf'iltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. 'The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.9.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specifcation D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexibie seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, ihe sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets ' � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � SectionN.doc Page ]8 of 128 5l15/2012 � � ' � � r � �� , � � Section IV — 7'echnicat Specifications shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to � remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. � � ' Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop azound pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate a11 existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 'The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a mazked set of "As Built" construction drawings , describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings � SectionN.doc Page 19 of I28 5/15l2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTlNG OF GRAVtTY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a cmwn lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. Iri no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Caze shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2} hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.'t . GRAViTY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipxnent and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. � � � � � � � � SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 128 5/152012 � � � � � � � � � � � � r � � � � u Section IV —Technical Specifications 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1"Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contraetor sha11 obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform a11 required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Speeifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials aze acceptable: 2. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition}, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell sha11 be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 9l2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be pmvided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City SectionIV.doc Page 2l of 128 5/IS/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI} shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, ete.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the ta.ck coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200-7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11 and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (U2"}. Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 128 5/IS/2012 � � � � � � r � � � , nI � u � � � � � � �� ' � � Section IV —Technica] Specifications stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specificatians (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The e�ent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2400 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values sha11 either be conected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition}. 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on madway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. � SectionIV.dce � Page 23 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MtXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUlPMENT � QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality controUassurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 200� Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following� 1. Density per Section 330-i 1 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/a" or greater sha11 be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.23 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of'/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall noti the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimea asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: SectionIV.doc Page 24 of 128 � � � � � � � LJ � � � �� , � � 5/15/2012 � � i � � � � � � � � � � � � � L ' � Section IV — Technicaf Specifications Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S—I Type S—I with Type S—III FC-3 Type S—III Type S—I Type S—III with FC-3 with FG3 Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer 1 st 2nd 1 st 2"� 1 st 2nd 1 st 2"d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 1 I 1 %2 1 %2 2 1'/4 3/ * 1 1 2%2 1'/4 1'/4 1'/2 1 1'/2 1 3 1%2 1'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engirieer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S—III shall be limited to the final(top) structural layer (one layer only). � 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall inclnde a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S—III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily tr�c (ADT) of less than 3000, and a11 residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 33Q of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionIV.doc Page 25 of 128 5/152012 Section N — Technical Specifications 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHQLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement sha11 be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: l. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: l. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifcations. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied priar to installation of each ziser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. SectionIV.doc Page 26 of 128 � � � � � � � � � � � � � 5/l5l2012 � � u � [_i � � � � � � i � �J � Section IV — Technical Specifications Al1 manhole and valve adjushnents shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibiliTy to inform the owners of ali utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITlONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS I. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls oi�, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, a11 of the asphaltic concrete specifications in � Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). ' SectionN.doc Page 27 of 128 5/IS/2012 , Section IV — Technica] Specifications 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of ineasurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: l. Price adjustrnent for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwll.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further inereases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month a$er the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. SectionlV.doc Page 28 of 128 5/15l2012 � a �7 � LJ � � � � � � � � � � � �J , , � , , � � � , � � � , � 25.1 25.1.1 Section IV — Technical Specifications GENERAL PLANTING SPEClFICATIONS tRRIGATION DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The imgation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standazds and Specifications, and alI applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. � D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: � ' � � �+ � 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major eyuipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operarion and maintenance. � SectionIV.doc I b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. Page 29 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shaIl submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as sta.ted herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC} Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic controi valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. SectionlV.doc Page 30 of l28 L� LJ ' , � � ' II U � � � � � , � � � S/l5/2012 � � � � , � �l � � � � , Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned_ The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. i'VC body - with Teflon Ball Sea1s 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Sa.fe-T Shear Stem 5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z' IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: � 1. AWWA-G509 2. 2001b. O.W.Cx � 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem � 6. Bolted bonnet ' � � 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES � A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a � SectionN.doc Page 31 of 128 5/15/2012 � Section N — Technical Specifications pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemicaUtJV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT} inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for a11 internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and LJNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181U15 cover compazable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For au relief assembly use an Ametek # 182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATlON 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density lineaz polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shail be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Tndividual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hazd plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.90.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-74) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The ciripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPI-� utilizing a combination turbtilent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Ma�cimum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration sha11 be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". SectionIV.doc Page 32 of l28 5/} 5/2012 � � ' � � ' � r � L� � � � � �1 � � u � , ' � � � � , � � Section ]V — Technical Specifications B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. 'This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AtRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirlVacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 1 I O psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS � A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filtez with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of ihe element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections sha11 be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings � and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. ' � � � 25.1.2.1'1 AUTC)MATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrazed connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shail have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless , of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 sta.tions either sequentially or independently. � SectionIV.doc Page 33 of 228 5/15/2012 � Section N—Technical Specifications D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter sha11 communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and ha�e a removable, reversible pmtective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter sha11 have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen sha11 automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the pmgress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessazy shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent sha11 not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent sha11 represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and a11 inspections required by outside authorities. SectionlV.doc Page 3a of l28 5/152012 , u � �_ i i� � � , r � � �� , � � � � � � LJ � � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. � G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract � Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. r � � � � � � � � ' H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.'! TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) sha11 have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granulaz material with no foreign matter larger than %2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. , F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped azea, compaction shall not exceed 95% of m�imum density. ' SectionIV.doc Page 35 of 128 5/15/2012 , Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of inechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special p�ecautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 R�UT[NG OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. l. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTiNG BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all e�cisting sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. SectionIV.doc Page 36 of l28 ' � � � � � , � � � � , ,�� ' ' 5/IS/20I2 , � � ' u'� , �J � � � � � , �� Section IV —Technical Specifications B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. l. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After a11 sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. AlI repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. � B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. , � ' ' ' 1 C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with su�icient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Scheduie, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Fnrnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute a11 other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specifed in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the SectionlV.doc Page 38 of 128 5/15/2012 � � ��i � � � I'�J � � � , � � ' � , , ' � LJ � , C� , � �� , � � Section IV —Technical Specifications Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for mainta.ining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held hannless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with a11 other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Cali "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefuily examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instnictions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor � must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. � B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any � substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. i i_ ' r�I D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions sha11 be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or H7': The over-a11 height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with ' no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. , SectionlV.doc Page 39 of ]28 5/IS/2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications C. W.: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O. C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LYS.. Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. S7'D.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. SectionN.doc Page 40 of 128 5/15/2012 , ' , , ' � ' I_� � � ' � � � �_� ' ' ' , Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor � Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B& B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined a$er minirnum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from tnuik unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded azea. SectionlV.doc Page 41 of l28 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape A.rchitect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the. approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of alt underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon awazd of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative andlor the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITtES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minirnize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. SectionIV.doc Page 42 of 128 5/IS/2012 , ' L! � L _J � ' ' ' , , � � ' , , �J ' ' , ' , Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE � A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint , Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. ' ' ' � 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of gmwth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. PIants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader}, unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a"Y" shape or parallel branching aze not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality ' for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition}. D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at ' the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. � E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. ' F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. _In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. � When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. L� ' L� ' , G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pnzning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material sha11 be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where syinmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. SectionIV.doc Page 43 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balis and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B& B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shatl have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specifed) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shalt be 104% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specifed on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTtLIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be tuuform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specif'ied herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Grround cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than %4 the nitrogen level. They shall alsa contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). SectionN.doc Page 44 of l2S ' � ' � � , �1 ' � � LI � Ll � r l.J ' 5/I5/2012 ' ' , ' , Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. , Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with , a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used azound the palm trunk. � �I D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL , A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be , unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. � ' C� ' ' , B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There rnust be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed prepazation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of pianting azea. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION ' A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree ' within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4-%Z feet above grade. , ' SectionIV.doc ' Page 45 of 128 5/I S/20 T2 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materiats from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mazk all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated wzth Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary conections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniforxn and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. SectionlV.doc Page 46 of 128 5/15l2012 �� ' ' ' ' r ' � � , ' 1 _� � ' , � , , , , u ' �� ' � L� ' ' , , � ' ' ' Section IV — Technical Specifications F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1-'h inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or Ioosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3}, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that swrface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of rutrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepazed seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. ' C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using cIean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.Q - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat sha11 be used in berm construction. ' 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans ' by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as SectionlV.dce Page 47 of l28 5/IS/2012 ' Section ]V —Technical Specifications the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers oz vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 3 gallon 5 gallon 7 gallon Trees Palms 1 - 21 gram tablet 2 - 21 gzam tablet 3 - 21 gram tablet 4 - 21 gram tablet 3 tablets each'h" (12 millimeters) caliper 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil azound the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. - s�c�o�v.a� Page 48 of I28 5/IS/2012 , � ' , � ' � ' ' , � J � ' ' , , � i , ' , � Section N — Technical Specifications G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. ' H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. LJ � I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. , B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. ' � L� �i � ' t �I ; ' ' C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of a11 the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to l-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKlNG ' A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes pez tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. tSectionIV_doc Page 49 of 128 5l152012 ' Section IV — Technical Specifcations Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade_ B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the Iandscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous azeas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched cleazance from the outside edge of annuals. 25,2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 50 of 128 5/l5l2012 ' �J � ' ' , �J ' � ' ' , � u , , , � I_ l , , Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTlON � A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. � �- !� L, B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. � 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES � , � ' � i � � � � ' E. The Contractor shall repair al] damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: l. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor sha11 notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for a11 planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.'I I NS P ECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. , SectionlV.doc ' Page 51 of 128 5/l5/2Q12 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an"approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The imal selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where planis installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specifed plant nnaterials. No additionat compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty ail palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1} year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. ShouId any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SectionIV.doc Page 52 of ] 28 L J� I I L_� I�I � � ,--, �I �', � �I ' ' '�I � i � , � u , 5/15/2012 ' � J � , � L� I ' C� 26.1 Section IV —Technical Specifications HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING tNTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY � The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for � prequalification approval for this project must e�ibit e�ctensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The � installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. � 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell � classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor sha11 provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from tl�e manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material , shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: 1 � � � Material Pro e ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner sha11 be reviewed for defects and tested in � accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of detivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by � the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. � SectionlV.doc Page 53 of ]28 5/IS/2012 � Section N—Technical Specifications Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a eoded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thiclaiess. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATtON It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restora.tion. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traific, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the pubtic, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor sha11 immediately notify the Engineer of any constraction delays taking place du.ring the insertion operation. Contractor sha11 maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects sha11 be removed and replaced by the Cvntractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces aze to be met. SectionlV.doc Page 54 of 128 SIIS/2012 � ' �� P� � � � � J � � � � � � � � ' , � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service_ Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, � bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. , � ' � � � � ' I� 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of Iike material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 28 REPORTING UF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of eity Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimuzn of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement sha11 be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASiS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price sha11 be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipnnent, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE StDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SiDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plaris or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"}, except at driveway crossings where a minimuxn thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. eoncrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, ?, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/14 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper tlurd of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not pmperly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. SectionlV.doc Page 56 of 128 � � � ,� � � � � � � � �_ � 5/15/2012 , � � � � �� l �I � � � � � �J � Section N — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement sha11 be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include a11 materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a sepazate bid item, it shall cover a11 labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each squaze foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch sha11 be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed sha11 be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 24 lb. of Rye Seed (to tota160 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 128 5/15/2�12 � Section IV — Technical Specifications � When this work is given as a bid item, the item sha11 cover all labor, material, equipment (including water}, required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such � work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BAS{NS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to � 235. ' When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the speciiications, 5ection Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES � Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circulaz in shape � conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of � concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints sha11 be completely iilled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every s�th course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with AST'M C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of � precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be � acceptable for storm structures. SectionIV.dce Page 58 of 128 5/IS/2012 � ' � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERtAL USED � This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. � � 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFlCATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. � 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS � � 37.'! CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS � The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firtn known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. � � � � 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service sha11 be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. SectionN.doc Page 59 of 128 5l15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video poriion of the recording. The andio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER 4RIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera sha11 be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibiliiy. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping sha11 not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. SeciionlV.doc Page 60 of 128 5/IS/2012 � � ,� � � � � � l� � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. � 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of � construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system feaiures, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. � within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. � 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL � 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS � No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as sVaw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent � vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. � 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent � erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabitized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, a11 storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by � sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. � SectionIV.doc Page 6I of 128 5/l5/20I2 � Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention azeas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS 4R WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer azea whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer azea aze disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3} calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing sha11 be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within thzee (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. SectionN.doc Page 62 of ] 28 � � � � � � �� 5/15/2012 � � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILiTY CONSTRUCTION � � � , The construction of underground utility lines and other structures sha11 be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 4001ineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shaIl be checked regularly, especially after each. rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. ' 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fne and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a"Stop Work Order". � City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. r ��` � � 0 � � � � � SectionlV.doc Page 63 of 128 5/IS/2012 � Section IV—Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prinne contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances aze usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: l st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractar to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-474I. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionIV.doc Page 64 of 128 5/I S/20l 2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7— EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST 8E RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re-inspection Fee � $80.00 Re-inspection Fee Stop Work Order DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Inspector's Signature: CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 & ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750 Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings ofthe inspector.) IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionIV.doc Page 65 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Mazks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendiculaz to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CON"I'RACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall fumish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. � � � � � �� f� � � SectionN.doc Page 66 of 128 5/15/2012 � � ! � � � � � J Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies fumished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and fmished to high standazds of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Ciass Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure (In.) (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 031 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 8l or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A2I.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVtNYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE � Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. � Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe sha11 have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: � � $ectionIV.doc Page 67 of 128 5/l5/2012 u Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length (OD/Thick.) (PSI) (Ft) 4 18 150 24 6 18 15U 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.�Z solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAW WA C 153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating sha11 be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel j oint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionIV.doc Page 68 of 128 5/15l20}2 � � � �, � �j � Section IV — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above gade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nnts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they aze to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSUA.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all intemal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the � service intended and sha11 be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber m conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. � All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. � � � _� � � 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Va1ve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionIV_doc Page 69 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the appmval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modif cations: � 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a#7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. I 1. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with O- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. I5. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-l/2-inch hose nozzies and one (l) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SectionN.doc Page 70 of 128 5/15/2012 � L_ J � � � � � � � � � � u � � � � Section N — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint_ All paints shall comply with AW WA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from � the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. � � All hydrants shalt be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut of� without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Departxnent. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES � Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The lazgest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC � 202 series) sha11 be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and sha11 have stainless steel straps. � � � � � � � 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS l. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as speciiied therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be irrunediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and ali devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: � SectionN.doc � Page 71 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING l. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe sha11 be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a ma�cimum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. �� I � � SectionIV.doc Page 72 of 128 5/l5/2012 � � i�J � � Section IV —Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 ( NSTALLATtON Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. � If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. � � � � �i All pipe and fittings sha11 be carefully examined far cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most wlnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and � workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the a�cis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the � Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. � � Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. � SectionIV.doc �� Page 73 of 128 5lIS/2012 41.3.3 Section IV — Technical Specifications SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in a11 cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the fnished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles pazallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as d'uected by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. � � � ;� � � � � � � � � �� SectionIV.doc Page 74 of l28 5/15/2012 � � �� L� � � � u � Section IV — Technica3 Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections ta existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the Ciry of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of I 50 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AW WA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing � shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants axe not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices genezally at the ends of the lines. � � � � 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionIV.doc Page 75 of 128 5/t5lZOl2 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AW WA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If inethods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 AAEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing � Excavation, including necessary pavement removal � Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill � Gracling • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionIV.doc Page 76 of 128 � � l� � � � � � � � �� I� snsi2o�2 � � ' , Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS N41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT � � � � � � � � � � �� The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for fumishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 41.6.4.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Yayment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FlRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for fwnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionIV.doc Page 77 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFlCATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 squaze foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE C�URSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in prepazation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELfNG COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimwn of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standazd Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than %4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.doc Page 78 of l28 5/15/2012 � u � � � �J � � � � � � �I � � � � � ' � � I� � � Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts sha1l be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat andlor patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. 1 After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work sha11 be without compensation. � In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not � require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer oz patch mix. � � �� No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface sha11 have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48} hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines sha11 be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionIV.doc Page 79 of l28 5/]5/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the pexsonnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive al] permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizonial control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four comers of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 8Q of l28 5/l5l20I2 LJ � � � � �� J � � � � � � LJ Section IV —Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS � The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. � 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SlTE PREPARATION 't 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY � The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence � surrounding the tennis courts and a11 underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the � proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new � courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. � �J � � � � 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade sha11 be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the m�imum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The Contractor shall pmvide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-1 SO is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUlREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionN.dce Page 81 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LIPIER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that aze resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Crrade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court azea with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the fmished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one { 1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionIV.doc Page 82 of 128 � � � � � � � � � C� � � � � 5/IS/20I2 � � � � � 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN Section IV — Technicat Specifications The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and � described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published speci�cation. � J �� I_J �� 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Arrieristar HT 25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-offtype, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (� foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10} foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.70.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in � width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. � 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS � SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- � eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts sha11 be set plumb and true so as to support � SectionIV.doc Page 83 of 128 5/l5/2012 i Section IV —Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42} inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty palyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchar. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each} - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminutn; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two nibber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six-foot length aluminum_ SectionN.doc Page 84 of 128 � � � � � � � � � �� i, J � � � � � � � s/isnoi2 � � � �r Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE � Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. � 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty � square inch running pressure at its terminus. This gallons of water per minute for each court. � � � � , � � _l � � �� ' � 43.2.13 CONCRETE (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per line shall have the capacity to supply 30 Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggegate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNtS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis conrt sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Pazks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. Th:e City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336} 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionIV.doc Page 85 of 128 snsr�o�2 Section IV —Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fi�ctures and place on pole TS Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole TS new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole TS Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place "on pole TS Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipmeni to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) yeaz from the date of completion. SectionlV.doc Page 86 of 128 5/15/2012 , � � � C� � � � � � � � , � � � ' � � � � � ' � � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY , The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: � � � � � � workers, pedestrians, This general objective • Provide adequate advance waming and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a tra�ic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours mazked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction � SectionlV.doc � Page 87 of 128 5/] 5/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Tr�c staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board�Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message boazd is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBL{C NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Tr�c Operations Division, Mnnicipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 228 5/15/20I2 � � � � , ' ' � � � �� r �J � Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and tr�c control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone tr�c control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain tr�c control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traff'ic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traf�ic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINlNG 45.1 INTENT , It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place joinfless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand � SectionIV.doc Page 89 of 128 5/l5/2012 � Section 1V — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City reqtures that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for preyualification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the Iiner system. The City reserves fuil and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber feit tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexaral Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Yeazs) ASTM D638 3,000 psi ASTM D79Q 4,500 psi ASTM D790 300,000 psi ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for ihe liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surFace free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to proteet the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 128 5/15/2012 �) � �� ' L� , � � � � , � � � � � � � � � � Section N — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION � After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The � television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. , , 45,6 LINER INSTALLATtON Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufachzrer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place , during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, � excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. �� u � � � ' ' � 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals sha11 be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections aze to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT � Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of � manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. , SectionIV.dce Page 91 of 128 S/l5/2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufactnre as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected Iocations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DfMENStONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 128 5/15/2612 � ��i , �� , ' ' � � � � � ' , � � � , � , � � � i � � � r� u LJ � U Section ]V — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTtCES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufactnrer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp ohjects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above grotmd. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of zneeting atl conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE '' 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS , ' � � , CJ � The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: I2-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 2I-inch existing sewer. 21'/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5} into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5} into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to T'V inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be deternuned by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionIV.doc Page 93 of 128 5/152012 Section N —Technicat Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTtON SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:I maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable sha11 be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of I2 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to a11ow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recomrnended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm a11 pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 128 5/15l2012 ' � �� i � , � � ' , � � � � � � I� � � � Section IV — Technical Spec�cations Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket sha11 be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations sha11 be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locafions other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. � 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE , u , �� , ' L�' 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and iittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this speciiication. SectionIV.doc Page 95 of 128 5/1S/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be l3 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one hal� cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1(one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cernent, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 833 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incoxporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is ta obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionIV.doc Page 96 of 128 5/ISl2012 ' ' � � u � � , �1 , � � � � u '�� II u � � ' Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS � Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimu.m 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. � 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the ' American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C15Q for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. , ' � � � � �� C J'' , Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hazd, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coazse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No. 4 Sieve Passing No. 8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 34 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No. 100 Sieve 48.6 WATE R 100% 95%to 1Q0% 80% to 1 QO% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% 10% to 30% 2% to 10% Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, andlor organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 833 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated fronn cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It � shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. � � , Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximutn drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SecUOnlV.doc Page 97 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formatian that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasied surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all la.rge particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be pernutted to become damp. Each batch should be entizely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the dnun at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack af cement, inclnding the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is a.nticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be fmm an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionIV.doc Page 98 of 128 5/15/2012 r �� r ' � � � � � , , ' � � , r ' ' �J , ' � 11 � � ' LJ � � ' ' ' � ' r ' Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite sha11 be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to zestore the azea as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of inesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing zeinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface sha11 be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat suzface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, sha11 be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SectionIV.doc Page 99 of l28 5/152012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTlON Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously fumish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun sha11 have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. T'he interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it sha11 be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press. (cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor sha11 be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reiriforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionN.doc Page 100 of 128 5lIS/2012 ' , ' � ' � ' � � � , r ' � Ci i �_ �J � ' , ' ' ' ' ' Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT it is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the shuctural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT � Paynnent for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the foliowing items and the cost of such work shall be included in the � pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring andlor dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortaz; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions � and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. � �I � �� 1 , , ' ' ' 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortaz shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags af Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionIV.doc Page 101 of l28 5lIS/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTtOPI Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into yuick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as neazly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 I/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govem all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor sha11 fnrnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum I/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application_ All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application_ 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionIV.doc Page 102 of 128 ' , ' ' , r ' � �_� � C1 , � � � � � I i 5/15/2012 � ' ' , Section N — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. � 49.4.1 MATERIALS � ' � , 49.4.1.1 PATCH{NG MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: l. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATtON CONTROL � Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: ' l. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. � 49.6 GROUTtNG MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according , to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 54 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX ' Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: , 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 149) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi ' 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. � 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 -{- pcf ' Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to ' S/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. ' SectionIV.doc Page 103 of 128 5l15/2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-5 l pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds m�imzun allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth imish. 49.8 WATE R Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with dischazge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem aule road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and runrung lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionlV.doc Page t04 of 128 5/15/2012 ' ' � � � � , u , � ' ' ' � � ' �I , � � � � � ' ' � ' ' ' ' ' � CI', ' L� ' Section N — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Afler all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four {4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTlNG At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the �wner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING , Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long. as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. ' SectionIV.doc Page 105 of l28 5/15/2012 , Section IV —Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with ihe manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time sha11 be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72} inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.7 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing}, where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and nonconosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 SectionIV.doc 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Page l06 of I28 � ' ' � ' ' , ' ' ' C1 � ' ' ' [-1 � snsr�o�2 , , i 1 � � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength � Elongation Bonding Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 400% ASTM D 3574-86 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent � seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: , Density Tensile Strength Elongation ' Shrinkage Toxicity t ' ' ' ' � ' 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING 8.75-9.171bs/gal ASTM D-3574 150 psi ASTM D- 412 250% ASTM D-3574 Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Non Toxic A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liyuid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will contanue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1 xl0 llcm/sec to 7.6x10 cmisec at 100% RH at 50% RH A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and ' provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: � Calcium Atuminate Cement ]2 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionIV.doc Page 107 of 128 5/IS/2012 � Section IV — Technical Specificalions Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Sh-ength, Psi 1 Q00 1500 1800 200Q Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <Q.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astrr► C 497 PorositylAdsorption Test 4- 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calciu.m aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C l 116 and ASTM C] 018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATiNG A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume Color (other colors available on request) Pot Life, hrs Tensile Strength, psi, min Tensile Elongation, % Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882} psi 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 1:1 Light Gray 1 2,000 10 —20 5 1,800 Alcohols, Trich}oroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps}, if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. SectionIV.doc a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. Page 108 oF 128 ' r—i � ' � , � � ' � ' ' , ' , I. � ' � 5/15/2012 ! � ' , � � C'I � � � � , � ' � � 1 , � Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to a11 surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 sha11 be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATiON An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. , SectionN.doc ' Page 109 of 128 5l15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING l. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth fnish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6} hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers` recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and nineTy (90) seconds for sevenTy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship sha11 be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionlV.doc Page 110 of 128 ' � , �� I� � � , � l_� � 6� 5/IS/2012 , � ' ' ' � � �� U �� Section IV — Technica{ Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, � cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation}. ' 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL ' FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minunum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and � other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. � ' 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ' l. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: � ' � � ' Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60-80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20-40 gallons 60�-900 pounds 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .OS -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with Califarnia Ti-Coat according to Specifcation Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionIV.doc Page 111 of']28 5/15/2012 51.4 Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. APPLICATIQN OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE ' ' �� After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted � rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base Plexichrome Water 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 30 gallons 20 gallons 20 gallons 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.OS gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines sha11 be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled anuns with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than l 40°F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionIV.doc Page ] 12 of 128 snsrzoi2 � ' � L� , � � � Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. � 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION � � This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 53.1 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES MATERIAL � 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 1 Gabion & mattress basket uxvits shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1463 inches (approx. US gauge � 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating 1 shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-23 9. � � ' � � ' The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4%2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.�73 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside azea to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionIV.doc Page I l3 of 128 5/]5l2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class l, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.044 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in coIor and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. l. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 134. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B}. 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at wluch the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HCl (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at b3 degrees centigrade. SectionN.doc Page I 14 of 128 � L� � � � � � ' � � � � � � � � snsi2o�2 , � u ' � Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested. in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. , 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS Af�er the above Acce}erated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: � l. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable � change in color. 2. Specific Crravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. � 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. � 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 1 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. ' 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. �� , � i�� ' � 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 20% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +l 8 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: T`he filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM l OT096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% SectionIV.doc Page 1]5 of 128 5/l5/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table l. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTtLE FABRIC Fabric shall canform to FDOT Standard Index I99, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. T'he wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of inesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionIV.doc Page 116 of 128 S/15l2012 ' , � � � � � � �� , � � � � �_I � � ' � L_, � � � , � ' �J � , � � � � � Section N — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obsin,ictions which may teaz or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; � Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; � Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted}; • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. � SectionIV.doc � Page 117 of 128 5/] 5/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be irimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.- Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or Ju1y following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES {CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be Ieft in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionN.doc Page 118 of 128 5/15/2012 � ' , � , �� I � � � � � � � � � � � ' i � � � � LI � � � Section ]V — Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular tr�c areas aze to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. T'he City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-Febnaary, eazly June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL iN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they aze properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing ' should be kept covered with mulch. T'uner should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in � advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthIy maintenance fee. � � 1__ � r � � � 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the mot zone (iypically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionlV.doc Page 119 of 128 5/152012 Seciion IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freezelfrost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor sha11 provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor sha11 perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no fi.uther than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK �thin 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary cortective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month wananty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionIV_dce Page 120 of 128 � , � � � � � , u � ' ' �� 5/IS/ZOl2 , ' 1 1 � ' Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regulaz payment to the Contractor. ' S. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall � schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. ' � , � ' 55 55.1 MILLING OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS l. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. , 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. , Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. � 4. In cases where concrete valley swales aze present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line ' and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. 'The cost of tlus removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. � LI � � 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 200Q Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, untess otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SectionlV.doc Page 121 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section lV —Technical Specifications 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation sha11 be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer} per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-495Q to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the materiat in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment sha11 be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustrnents (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adj acent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of paveznent). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. � � � � � � i � ' � � , ' , ' � � SectionlV.doc Page 122 of 128 5/15l2012 r ' , � Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS ' Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) aze to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. ' ' � L_J � � 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, eyuipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBiNG The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of a11 structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in �ccordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard � Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. LJ ' ' ' 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP , The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). � � ' ' 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionIV.doc Page 123 of 128 5/I52012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be gxanted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit doc�mentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. T'he documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfizr dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This spec�cation inclndes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, fieid tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionIV.doc Page 124 of 128 5/1S/2012 � , ' �, � � � i � � , i , � _J � �_l , � , 1 C� 1 � ' � � ' Section IV — Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, tr�c controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, rernoval of existing traff'ic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans ' and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. � , ' , ' �� ' �l � 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted tr�c stripes and markings (Section 714), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 712) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Enors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-ouY' with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standazd Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BAS1S OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents andlor plans and shall include a11 equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. ' SectionIV.doc ' Page 225 of 128 5/15/2012 62 Section IV — Technical Specifications TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be pIaced around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including a11 staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of a11 species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximwn distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it sha11 be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers sha11 remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, a11 surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the bamer no such material or litter sha11 be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At a11 times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified mot pnuung equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionIV.doc Page 126 of 128 ' , , L� � � � ' C� , , ' �I � �� ' � 5/l5/2012 � � ' ' �I �� Section N — Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is ' feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. ' , ' E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of I 8" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". � H. Root pruning shall be performed using Alternate equipment or techniques must any work adjacent to trees to be preserved a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. be approved by the CiTy's representative, prior to � I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree ' roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled azound to prevent damage to the root. ' C_� K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary imgation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines aze to be installed within the critical root zone, the root , pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. ' � ' ' 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNiNG A. All tree pruning and/or root pnuung on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified azborist. Furthermore, all tree work sha11 conform to the American National Standards Instiiute (ANSI) 20Q1, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standazd practices (pruning) ANSI A-30Q. SectionIV_doc Page 127 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technica] Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 3Q percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the cun-ent City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs sha11 be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standazds and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.or�,/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT 19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of vaziable-width tables, user-adjnstable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND tTS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all intemal conespondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the P�.►blic Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV.doc Page 128 of l28 5/15l2012 ' ' � ' � C� ' ' ' � � Cl � ' � ' � , , , , ' � LJ , , Section FV — Technica] Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the praject; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 tNTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than CiTy's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ' Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. � 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ,� r-1 ' ' , , ' � 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of ovezhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1- Having the power lines de-energized and visibly grounded. Option 2- Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of cleazance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3- Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet) Up to 50 10 Over SO to 204 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 ' SectionIV.doc Page 129 of 128 5/IS/2012 � Section IV — Technicai Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over l OQ0 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over SO to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionIV.doc Page 130 of 128 5/IS/2012 ' U.S. DEP,�RTMEM'OF HOMELAND SECURITY ELEVATION CERTlFICATE 'Federab Emergency Management Agency National Flood Insurance Program Important: Read the instructions on pages 1-9 SECTION A - PROPERTY tMFORMATION ' A1. Building Owner's Name CITY OF CLEARWATER (11-102-3) A2. Building Street Address (inc(uding Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. 7 CAUSEWAY BLVD , , , , , � II� City CLEARWATER State FL ZIP Code 33767 OMB No. 1660-C1008 Expires March 3'I , 2012 A3. PropeKy Description (Lot and Biock Numbers, Tax Parcel Number, Legai Description, etc.) CLEARWATER BEACH CONCESSION(NEW BATHROOMS) A4. Building Use (e.g., Residentiat, Non-Residentiaf, Addition, Accessory, etc.) NON-RESIDENTIAL A5. Latitude/Longitude: Lat. 27°58.63'N Long. 82°49.71'W Horizontal Datum: ❑ NAD 1927 � NAD 1983 A6. Attach at least 2 photographs of the building if the Ce�tificate is being used to obtain flood insurance. A7. Building Diagram Number 1B A8. For a building with a crawlspace or enclosure(s): A9. For a buitding with an attached garage: a) Square footage of crawispace or enclosure(s) N/A sq ft a) Square footage of attached garage N!A sq k b) No. of permanent Flood openings in the crawispace or b) No. of permanent flood openings in the attached garage endosure(s) within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade _ within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade c) Total net area of flood openings in A8.b _ sq in c) Total net area of flood openings in A9.b _ sq in d) Engineered flood openings? ❑ Yes ❑ No d) Engineered flood openings? ❑ Yes ❑ No SECTfON 8- FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP (FiRM) IIJFORMATION 61. NFIP Communiry Name & Community Number 62. County Name 63. State � CLEARWATER 125096 PINELLAS FL B4. Map/Panel fVumber B5. Su�x B6. FIRM Index 67. FlRM Panei 68. Flood 69. Base Flood Elevation(:�) (Zone 12103C0102 G Date Effective/Revised Date Zone(s) AO, use base flood de�ath) 8/18/09 9/03/03 VE 13.0' 610. Indicate the source of the Base Flood Elevation (BFE) data or base flood depth entered in Item B9. ❑ FIS Profile � FIRM ❑ Community Determined ❑ Other (Describe) 611. Indicate elevation datum used for BFE in ttem 69: ',] NGVD '929 � NAVD 1988 � Othe; (Describe; 612. is the buiiding located in a Coastal Barrier Resources System (CBRS) area or Othervvise Protected Area (OPA)? ❑ Yes � No Designation Date ❑ CBRS 0 OPA ' SECTION C- BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY REQUIRED) C1. Building elevations are based on: ❑ Construction Drawings' ❑ Building U�der Consiruction' � Finished Construction 'A new Elevation Ce�tificate will be required when oonstruction of the building is �mplete. C2. ElevaUorts - Zones A1-A30, AE, AH, A(with BFE), VE, V1-V30, V(with BFE}, AR, AR/A, AR/AE, ARlA1-A30, AR/AH, ARlAO. Complete Items C2.a-h , below according to the building diagram specified in Item A7. Use the same datum as the BFE. Benchmark Utitized CITY BM G-03Vertical Datum 4.749'(NAVD 1988 DATUMI Conversion/Comments ' , , ' ' ' l_J Check the measurement used. a) Top of bottom floor (including baseme�t, crawlspace, or enclosure floor) 8.7 � feet ❑ meters (Puerto Ri� only) b) Top of the neM higher floor N/A._ ❑ feet � meters (Puerto Rico only) c) Bottom of the lowest horizontal structural member (V Zones only) NlA.._ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) d) Attached garage (top of slab) N/A._ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) e) Lowest elevation of machinery or equipment servicing the building IVlA._ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) (Describe type of equipment and location in Comments) fl Lowest adjacent (finished) grade next to building (LAG) 6.3 � feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) g) Highest adjacent (finished) grade next to building (HAG) 7.2 � feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) h) Lowesl adjacent grade at lowest eievation of deck or stairs, including N/A.._ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) structural support SECTION D- SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION Thic eprtifira#inn ia tn ha cinnarl anrl cEialui hv a IAf1lI CI INAV(lf a+nnincnr nr �r�hHuct ai ithnri�orl hv law tn rartifv alav�finn tMPORTANT: �+gthese spaces, copy the corresponding information from Section A. Buildir�g Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. 7 CAUSEWAY BLVD-NEW BA7HROOMS City CLEARWATERState FL ZIP Code 33767 SECTION D- SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION (CONTINUED) Copy both sides of this Elevation Certificate for (1) community official, (2} insurance agenUcompany, and (3j building owner. Comments ' Signature Date ❑ Check here ifattachments SECTION E- BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY NOT REQUIRED) FOR ZONE AO AND ZONE A(WITHOUT BFE) For Zones AO and A(without BFE), comp�ete Items E1-E5. If the Certificate is intended to support a LOMA or LOMR-F request, complete Sections A, B, and C. For Items E'I-E4, use natural grade, if availabie. Check the measurement used. In PueRo Rico only, enter meters. E 1. Provide elevation informa6on for the following and check the appropriate boxes to show whether the e{evation is above or below the highest adjacent grade (HAG) and the lowest adjacent grade {LAG). a) Top of bottom floor (induding basement, crawispace, or enclosure) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or 0 below the HAG. b),Top of bottom floor (inciuding basement, crawlspace, or endosure} is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ betow the LAG. E2. For Building Diagrams 6-9 with permanent flood openings provided in Section A Items 8 and/or 9(see pages 8-9 of Instructions), the next higher floor (elevation C2.b in the dia9rams) of the building is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E3. Attached garage (top of slab) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E4. Top of platform of machinery and/or equipment servicing the building is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or 0 below the HAG. E5. Zone AO only: If no flood depfh number is available, is the top of the bottom floor elevated in accordance with the community's Floodplain management ordinance? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Unknown. The local officiat must certify this information in Section G. SECTION F- PROPERTY OWNER (OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE) CERTIFICATION The property owner or owner's authorized representative who completes Sections A, B, and E for Zone A(without a FEMA-issued or community-issued BFE} or Zone AO must sign here. The statements in Sections A, 8, and E are correct to the best of my knowledge. Property Owner's or Owner's Authorized Representative's Name Address Signature Comments City Date State ZIP Code Telephone ❑ Check here if attachments SECTION G - COMMUNITY INFORMATION (OPTIONAL) The local officiai who is authorized by law or ordinance to administer the community's floodplain management ordinance can complete S and G of this Elevation Certificate. Complete the applicable item(s) and sign below. Check the measurement used in Items G8 and G9. ' ' ' , ' ' ' � � ' ' ' G1. ❑ The information in Section C was taken from other documentation that has been signed and sealed by a licensed surveyor, engineer, or architect who , is authorized by law to certify elevation infortnation. (Indicate the source and date of the etevation data in the Comments area beiow.) -� G2. ❑ A community officiai completed Section E for a building located in Zone A(without a FEMA-issued or community-issued BFE) or Zone AO. G3. ❑ The following information (Items G4-G9) is provided for community floodpiain management purposes. G4. Permit Number � G5. Date Permit issued G6. Date Certificate Of Compliance/Occupancy Issued ' G7. This permit has been issued for: ❑ New Cortstruct+on ❑ Substantial lmprovement G8. Elevation of as-buiit lowest floor (including basement) of the building: ❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum G9. BFE a(in Zone AO) depth of flooding at the building site: ❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum �10. Community's design flood elevation ❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum Local Official's Name Community Name Signature Comments Title Telephone Date ' ' , �J ❑ Check here if attachments FEMA Form 81-31, Mar 09 Replaces all previous editions � , , �uilding Photograph� See Instructions for Item A6. ' Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. Poi�cy Nomber 7 CAUSEWRY �i_vU-N_W BATHROOMS --- — --- _ — City CLEARb`VATER State FL ZIP Code 33767 CompanyNAlCNumber , ---- ff using the F_ievation Certificate to obtain NFIP flood insurance, affix at least two building photographs befow according to , the instructions for Item A6. Identify all photographs with: date taken; "Front View" and "Rear View"; and, if required, "I�ight Side View" and "Left Side View." If submitting more photographs than will fit on this page, use the Continuation Page an the reverse. ' � � , ' � ' , ' , �� C�' � ' i ��itding Photogra�h� Continuation Page ForJnsurance Company Use: Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. poiicy Number - 7 CAUSEWAY BLVD-NEW BATHROOMS Clty CLEARWATER StBte FL ZIP COde 33767 CompanyNAiCNumbe� If submitting more photographs than wilf fit on the preceding page, affix the additionai photographs below. Identify all photographs with: date taken; "Front View" and "Rear View"; and, if required, "Right Side View" and "Left Side View." ' ' � ' ' , , , , ' ' � ' � , ' , ' ' CITY OF CLEARWATER - PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMENT PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING PART 1— STORAGE BUILDING ADDITION PART 2— RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS CONTRACTOR'S REFERENCES SHEET OF SIMILAR TYPE PROJECTS PROJECT: PIER 60 CONCESSION BUILDING STORAGE ADDTTIONS PROJECT NO. 08-0064-PR-C PIER 60 CONCESSION BUII.DING RETAIL MECHANICAL RENOVATIONS DATE: SEPTEMBER 26, 2012 Commercial Building construction type work dollaz value must be submitted with bidder's proposal and must be filled out comp:letely by printing and legible not providing this form with the bidder's proposal or any blanks left on form shall constitute the bidder's proposal is non-responsive and bid will be rejected. 1. Project name: $ Value Date began: Date Completed: Address: City: , State: Contact person E-mail address: Phone: Fax: 2. Project name: $ Value Address: City: Contact person E-mail address: 3. Project name: $ Vatue Address: City: Contact person E-mail address: 4. Froject narne: $ Value Address: City: Contact person E-mail address: _ 5. Project name: $ Value Address: City: Coniact person E-mail address: Date began: Date Completed: _ , State: Phone: Fax: Date began: Date Completed: , State: Phone: Fa�c: Date began: Date Completed: . State: Phone: Fax: Date began: Date Completed: , State: Phone: Fax: , � � � ' 1 , ' , � ' � 1 ' , ' ' ' ' APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition Pier 60 Concession Building Storage Addition Project No. 08-00640-PR-C Clearwater Beach, Florida ARCAIT'ECT: Plisko Architecture, PA, AIA 800 Drew Street Cleanvater, FL 33755 7271342-7200 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: MECHAIVICAL ENGINEER: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCarthy & Associates, Inc 2555 Nursery Road Suite 101 Clearwater, FL 33764 727-536-8772 Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727)822-2335 Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727) 822-2335 Address all communications regarding this work to the Architect at the address listed above. � ' APA 08.12 �, � � � � i �J � � II � � � ' Pier 60 Storage Addition Pier 60 Concession Building Storage Addition Project No. 08-00640-PR-C Clearwater Beach, Florida SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS August 17, 2012 • Table of Contents • Schedule of Drawings Section Section Page Number Tide Number DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS o� ioo ................ su�,�y.................................:........................................................---.----.....oi ioo - i of 01322 ................ Photographic Documentation.......................................................................01322 - 1 of 01330 ................ Submittal Procedures.......................................................................-•----•-�---.01330 -1 of 01420 ................ References..................................................................................................... 01420 -1 of 01500 ................ Temporary Facilities and Controls...............................................................01500 -1 of 01524 ................ Conshuction Waste Management.........................................................:._....01524 - 1 of 01600 ................ Product Requirements ...................................................---............................01600 - 1 of 01731 ................ Cutting and Patching .............................---------�----........._...............................01731-1 of 01732 ................ Selective Demolition .......................-------........................................_.......------01732 - 1 of 01770 ................ Closeout Procedures ..................................................................................... 01770 - I of 01781 ................ Project Record Documents..........................................-•---.............----------..---01781-1 of DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 2 2 1 3 1 4 3 3 4 2 02220 ................ Site Preparation, Excavation, and Earthwork for Foundation ....................02220 -1 of 5 02361 ................ Termite Control............................................................................................02361-1 of 2 DI VISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 ................ Cast-in-Place Concrete.......-------...................................................................03300 -1 of 14 03320 ................ Precast Concrete U-Lintels and Sills ...........................................................03320 -1 of 2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 ................ Unit Masonry ................................................................................................04200 -1 of 12 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05521 ................ Pipe Railings.......................................... .......................................................05521-1 of 2 � 05720 ................ AIuminum Lift Out Railings .------.......-.--••--•----............................---....-----.----05720 - 1 of 4 DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTIC 1 TOC 1 of 2 � APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 06100 ................ Rough Carpentry...........................................................:......................--�--....06100 — 1 of 2 06160 ................ Sheathing ...-�------�-•--�--..............-�---�----...........................................................06160 —1 of 1 06164 ................ Gypsum Sheathing--.......................--�--..........................................................06146 —1 of 2 06192 ................ Prefabricated Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses..................................06192 — I of 5 06462 ................ Hardie Rustic Trun Boards .............................-----................................--------06462 —1 of 4 06463 ................ Hardie Soffit Panels and Battens ..............................--.--..............................06463 —1 of 4 DIVISION 7— THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 ................ Roof Penetration Curbs .........-�----....................................................---------....07200 —1 of 5 07210 ................ Building Insulation .......................................................................................07210 —1 of 1 07411 ................ Metal Roof Panels --�--...--��----......_.................................................................07411— 1 of 4 07520 ................ Modified Membrane Roofing ...................... .07520 —1 of 4 .................................. ............. 07720 ................ Roof Hatch and Fixed Ladder......................................................................07720 — 1 of 3 07730 ................ Roof Hatch Grip ................................................................--------�--....-�---.......07730 — 1 of 3 07920 ................ Joint Sealants --•-�--.............._......-----..............................._...............................07920 —1 of 5 DIVISION 8— DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 ................ Steel Doors and Frames (Provided by the City of Clearwater)..............._...08100 —1 of 5 08710 ................ Finish Hardware (Provided by the City of Clearwater) ..............................08710 — 1 of 7 DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09220 ................ Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) ....................................................:...........09220 — 1 of 3 09900 ................ Painting .......---...........................---....................---..........................................09900 —1 of 7 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10520 ................ Fire-Protection Specialties ...........................................................-.-.-----.......10520 —1 of 3 DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT (not used) DIVISION 12 — FURNISffiNGS (not used) DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (not used) DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS (not used) DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL Mechanical Specifications are on Sheet M3.1 Ptumbing Specifications are on Sheet P1.1 DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL Electrical Specifications are on Sheet E5.1 End of T�ble of Contents TOC � Cl � � � � � � � � � � ' ' � 2of2 , ' ' ' APA 08.12 , Schedule of Drawings A-1 TITLE SHEET AND SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS ' C ' � ' ' ! , Pier 60 Storage Addition ARCHITECTURAL A-1.1 BUILDING KEY PLAN A-2.1 FLOOR PLAN, DOOR SCHEDULE, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A-2.2 REFLECTED CEILING & ROOF PLANS A-3.1 1/4" EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-3.2 1/4" EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAIL A-4 1/4" BUILDING SECTIONS A-5.1 3/4" WALL SECTTONS A-5.2 3/4" WALL SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5-1.1 STRUCTURAI, SPECIFICATIONS 5-2.1 STRUCTUR.AL SPECIFICATIONS S-2 FOUNDATION PLAN AND DETAILS S-3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN AND DETAILS MECHAlVICAL M 1.1 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND NOTES M2.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION PLANS M3.1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS II,ECTRICAL � El.l ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET E2.1 ELECTRICAL PLANS E3.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS ' E4.1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULE E5.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION � 1 ' ' ' ' PLUMBING P1.1 PLUMBING COVER SHEET P2.1 PLUMBING RENOVATION PLAN SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 of 1 � ' , , APA 08.12 SECTION 01100 — SiTMMARY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work covered by Contract Documents. � 2. Access to site. 3. Coordination with occupants. 4. Work restrictions. Pier 60 Storage Addition 5. Specification and drawing conventions. � B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. , 1.2 � ' u ' � � � ' ' ' ' ' � C � PROJECT INFORMATION Project Identification: Pier 60 Concession Building Storage Addition. Project No. 08-0064PR-C. 1. Project Location: Pier 60 Clearwater Beach, Florida. Owner: City of Clearwater. l. Owner's Representative: Leroy Chin. Architect: Plisko Architecture, P.A. 800 Drew Street Ciearwater, FL 33755 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and Bidder's Proposal Form. B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire consixuction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day- to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. l. Maintain access to existing wallcways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct wallcways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.5 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certa.in terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otbenvise. SUMMARY O 1100 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition ' B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division i apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Tertninology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduted on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by re�erence keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in tbis Project Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100-2 of2 � ' ' ' ' � ��' � r � � , � , LJ � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administxative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within seven days of talang photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRA.PHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field offce at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in tbe same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photograpbs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adj acent to property before starting the Work. ' PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ' 01322 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. D. Periodic Consfizction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Cornpletion for submission as Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 2 of 2 � ' if� �J ' LJ APA 08.12 SECTION 01330 - SUBNIITTAL PROCEDURES PA.RT 1- GENERAL � 1.1 � L� � � � � I �� ' !� � � ' A. B. C. D. E. Pier 60 Storage Addition SUMIVIARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samptes, and other submittals_ See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as inirial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow I S days for review of each resubmittal. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 incbes on Iabel or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Arcbitect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and ad�ess of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � 01330 - 1 of 6 APA 08.12 Q E. F G I:� I. u Pier 60 Storage Addition , h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.O1.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked witb action taken and will be returned Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content ofprevious submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3.. Resubmit submiitals until they are marked "REVIEWED." Distribution: Furnish copies of fmal submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" taken by Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 21 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � � � � � � u � , � � � � � 01330-2of6 , � � ' APA 08.12 C � �' ' � u � ' , , � � � � C. f� Pier 60 Storage Addition 4. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return five copies. Mark up and retain one retumed copy as a Project Record Document. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instrucrions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated I. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, pattems, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. l. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one suhmittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of 5ample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Inirial Selection: Submit manufacturer's coior charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattem, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES i 01330 - 3 of 6 APA 08.12 2.2 E. F � /:� B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. l. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifyiug individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. INFORMATIONAL SUBNIITTALS General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification_ Certificates and certifications shall tae signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's let#erhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � r � � � � � � � � �J i � 01330 - 4 of 6 ' i , � APA 08.12 ' � � � � � � � � , , u � I� L. M. N � P � R. S T. �J V Pier 60 Storage Addition Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interprering results of field tests performed either during installarion of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instnictions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads: Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of soflware, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written informarion documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installarion of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating cunent status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will retum them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN � A. Ferformance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � 01330 - 5 of 6 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architec� B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. l. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. C Q E. CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW Review each submittal and check for coordination with otber Work ofthe Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Projectname and location, submittal nzunber, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, da.te of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT'S ACTION General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will retum them without action. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Reviewed. 2. Revise. 3. Rej ected. 4. Fumish as Corrected Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will retum it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be retumed without review. Submittals not required by the Conixact Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � � � '� � � � S � � � 01330 - 6 of 6 � I� ' , � � � � � LJ LJ C� � , � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01420 — REFERENCES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I, Pier 60 Storage Addition General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Condirions of the Contract. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agxeements within the construction industry that control performance ofthe Work. "Fumish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacIQng, assembly, installation, and similar operations. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. "Provide": Furnish .and install, complete and ready for the intended use. . "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on. which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A_ Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books"'National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECiJTTON (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 � REFERENCES �l 01420 - 1 of 1 � � ' � � , � ' � ' � � I1 , APA 08.12 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PARTl-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cos� 1.3 A. B. C. INFORMATIONAL SUBNIITTALS Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel_ Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each pertnanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construetion facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top rails. 1 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. ' 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and elasses of fire exposures. � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS O15d0 - 1 of 3 ' APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. l. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Anange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing Service. F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial CompTetion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for consiruction personnel. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated in Project Manual. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as reguired to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a_ Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times_ E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." ' � i ' , ' � ' r � Cl ' � , TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 of 3 � , ' , APA 08_12 Pier 60 Storage Addition F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle ' waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." � t ' ' , ' � l� � l� � ' , � 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, urilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisriiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by iunoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from constn2ction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operarions begin, fumish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. G. Barricades, Waming Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate bamcades, including waming signs and lighting_ H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01500 , TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ' 01500 - 3 of 3 ' ' L� , ' APA 08.12 SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Pier 60 Storage Addition PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes adxninistrative and procedtu-al requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. ' 1.2 , ' � ' , r �J , r �I ��,l A. B. C. D. DEFINITIONS Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfll or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Buming: Do not bum waste materials_ C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 ' CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT ' 01524 - i of 1 , �l � , �J �� , ' ' ' ' ' �I , , ' ' APA 08.12 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENER AT • Pier 60 Storage Addition 11 SiTMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and bandling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, wbether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items tbat have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractar of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements iu Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. , PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS � 01600 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance wit}� the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elemenis, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty fumished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2_ Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting speeial warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. �� r , �� I� U , ' , �l � � , , ' , PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 of 4 ' � , , APA 08.12 � , ' � � � ' , l_�' ' I� � � � � � : C. Pier 60 Storage Addition l. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranries not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitntions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered 3_ Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics thax are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for considerarion of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line tlzat includes both standard and premium items. , PRODUCI' REQUIREMENTS ,� � 01600 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 2.2 COMPARA.BLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 of 4 , ' ' ' ' ' ' LJ ' ' , ' � APA 08.12 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B_ See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate wby they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and otber significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. S. Utility Services and MechanicaUElectrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integrarion of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. ' 2.3 ir-�' L� , I_ ] ' A. B. C. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related �omponents in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.4 WARRANTY ' A_ Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materiats so as not to void existing warranties. ' CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 of 3 ' APA 08.12 L_J Pier 60 Storage Addition ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials tbat visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1_ If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 A. B. C. D_ PREPARATION Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage; Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Existing Utility Services and MechanicaUElectrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place consttvction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: C�t or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: C`ut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. CUTTING AND PATCHING , ' ' ' ' --, I �� ' ' ' , ' , ' � ' 01731 - 2 of 3 , LJ ' ' APA 08.12 ' �� ' � , LJ � ' ' ' ' ' r,, �I � ' , � �I � ' C. � Pier 60 5torage Addition 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other S ections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. Cleaning: Cleau areas and_spaces.where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and:similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 of 3 , � ' I_1 � u ' , L__J �_1 u ' � L_' , , ,' � ' APA 08.12 SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Pier 60 Storage Addition A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removai of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. See Division l Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. l. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART Z -PRODUCTS (Not Used} , SELECTNE DEMOLITTON � 01732 - I of 3 APA 08.12 PART 3 -EXECUTION LJ Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped_ B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and satvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflic� Promptly submit a written report to Architec� E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 I:� : UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanicaUelectrical systems s.erving areas to be selectively demolished. . 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, wallcs, wallcways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, syuare, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Tempararily cover openings to remain_ Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. SELECTNE DEMOLITION � �l ' ' �� III � ' �' �: �LJ I�'' � �I � �� , O1732 - 2 of 3 ' C_I ! , APA 08.12 � � ';� � __ , � � � ' , ' � ' � ' � u : C. Pier 60 Storage Addition 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire- suppression devices during flame-cutting operations_ 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations a8er selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an. EPA-approved landfilL . 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Buming: Do not bum demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Rehun adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION O1732 � SELECTNE DEMOLITION � 01732 - 3 of 3 ' ' APA 08.12 C ' ' ' SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAI. Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements_ 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Docurnents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. � 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. � �I ' � ' ' ' � 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maiutenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minirnum of seven days prior to requesring inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and subrnit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record informarion. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including specifie warranties, worlananship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and sirnilar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deIiver to location designated by Arehitect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4 APA 08.12 1.6 C. � A � � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, inciuding name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. Procedures Prior to Substantial Compietion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 2. Complete startup and tesring of systems and equipment. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, constxuction tools, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visuai defects. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work witi be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractar of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or wili notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit pest-control final inspecrion report and warranty. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to deternune acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate wiil be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. CLOSEOIJT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4 � � � � � � � � � � ' ' � ' � , � L� ' � I ' � �� ' � � APA 08.12 1.8 A. B. C. 3. Pier 60 Storage Addition Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 5UBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of wananties other ttian date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind wananties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thiclaiess as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES;' Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty . and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents atbeginning of document. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1, Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the Califomia Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Projec� a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 b. c. d. e. h. i. k. 1. m. Pier 60 Storage Addition Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Clean transparern materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free ofstains, including stains resulting from water exposure. . Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment_ Where damaged or wom itezns cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during conshuction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES C ��J � � � � � ' � � � � � O 1770 - 4 of 4 � � � i � r � � � �� y ' � � � � , APA 08.12 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: I . Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related RequiremenLs: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set of plots. b_ Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files anc3 three sets of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additionai information . were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addencla and contract modifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 21 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to infortnation on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurateIy. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; inclucle the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. � PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' 01781-1of2 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification � on cover sheets. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation � varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and � equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record tbe name of manufactur , supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. � 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as one paper copy. PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes_ Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legib2e condition, protected from deterioration and Ioss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal worlcing hours. END OF SECTION 01781 � � � � ,� , PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 of 2 � � � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � � , � � Pier 60 Storage Addition SECTION 02220 SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS PART1 GENERAL l .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section. B. A subsurface investigation and soils report have been completed for this project. All work in this secrion shall comply with the soils report. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state, local, and other duly constituted authorities in matters pertaining to: l. Permitting 2. Disposal of and hauling of waste material 3. Safety precautions 4. Barricades 5. Protection of environmental matters 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK � � A. Perform all work specified herein as indicated within the grading area, i.e., that area within which earth grades are shown to be approximately 5 feet outside building perimeter. Remainder of property is to be left undisturbed, except as otherwise authorized for such � purposes as spoil or stock pile areas, temporary ditches, swales and/or haul or access roads, in which case such authorized azeas become part of the grading area. This work includes, but is not limited to, the following: � � � � � 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. Clearing and grubbing of vegetation and debris of all kinds. Stripping. Excavating to grade and subgrades. Excavating and backfilling for foundations. Providing finish load-bearing subgrades for foundations. Disposal of removed materials. Dewatering. Laboratory testing. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision. 1. Excavation of backfill for utilities. 2. Finish grading. 1.04 GENERAL A. Contractor shall obtain a copy of the soils report for use with this section. B. The Contractor shall examine all drawings and the specifications, consulted the records of adjacent constntction and of any exisring utilities, and the connections, if any, and noted all conditions and limitations which may influence the work required by this Secrion. � EARTHWORK � 02220 - 1 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � C. Where recommendations presented in the soils report conflict with this section, the soils report shall govern. 1.05 EXISTING STRUC'I'UKES A. Care shall be exercised during excavation, backfilling, and compaction work to avoid damage to existing buildings or foundations. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect trees and dispose of all removed trees including stumps and roots. B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffc. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Control grades in vicinity of excavations to prevent surface water running into excavated areas. G. Conduct earthwork operations under this division to insure against rainwash and silting of watercourses, ponds and adjoining property resulting therefrom. Should such silting occur, restore such areas to their original condition if outside the grading areas, or to lines, grades and conditions shown specified if within grading areas, all at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 MATERIAI..S 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill material shall be as specified in the soils report or at least clean fine sand, free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. B. Source of new material and length of haul shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Drainage fill: Crushed stone or gravel so that 100% passes 1-1/2" sieve with not more than 10% passing a No. 4 sieve. PART 3 EXECUITON 3.01 PREPARATION A. Idenrify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. 1. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations. 2. Identify and flag surface and aerial utiliries. 3. Norify companies to remove and relocate utilities as required. EARTHWORK 02220 - 2 of 5 � � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition � 4. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. � � �� B. If required, perform remedial de-watering prior to any earthwork operations. C. Clear and grub site as defined in the soils report. D. Proof-roll the sub-grade in accordance with the soils report and under the observation of the testing laboratory. Proof-rolling will help locate any zones of especially loose or soft soils not encountered in the soil test borings. Then undercut, or otherwise treat these zones as recommended by the testing ]ab. E. Testing the sub-grade for compaction will be as directed by the testing laboratory and as shown on the structural drawings. 3.02 FILL A. Fill in areas where required shall be placed in loose lifts as directed by the soils report. B. In load-bearing areas, fill shall be compacted as recommended in the soils report or at least to 95% of maximum modified Proctor dry density. A moisture content within two percent (2%) points of optimum indicated by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D-15S7) is recommended. C. Perform compliance tests within the iill as directed by the testing lab. 3.03 E7XCAVATION. � A. Excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings, but excavation lines shall be such as to provide sufficient clearance for the proper execution of the work to be installed. Allowances shall be made for work and inspections. Bottom of all � excavations shall be trimmed to the levels indicated and sloping surfaces cut in steps shown on drawings. After carrying the excavation to the required depth, the Contractor shall await the inspection and testing of the bearing soil. � � � � � � B. Control of ground water, including all necessary equipment, to maintain all excavated areas in a dry condition shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Sides of temporary excavations can be cut to maximum slope of 1:1. However, no claim may be made by the Contractor for extra work for damages resulting from slope stability failure. D. The bottom of foundation excavarions shall be compacted after excavation to densify any soils loosened in the excavation process. Backfill soils placed adjacent to footing or walls shall be carefully compacted with a light rubber tired roller or vibratory plate compactor to avoid damaging the footings and walls_ Approved sand fills placed in footing excavations above the bearing level, in trench excavations, and in other areas which are expected to provide slab support and foundation embedment constraint shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density. E. Test all footing cuts for compaction to a depth of 1 foot, as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.04 DEWATERING A. Refer to the soils report for an estimate of seasonal high ground water table. 1 EARTHWORK � 02220 - 3 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition B. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall determine the depth of ground water just prior to construction to determine what dewatering will be required. C. Water control will consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, well points, sumps, and pumps, in conjunction with berms and any needed ditches. Deep wells will not be permitted. D. Approval by the Architect of data submitted shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for adequacy of dewatering system. In the event that during the progress of the work it is determined that the dewatering system is inadequate, the Contractor shall install and operate such addirional dewatering equipment and/or make such changes in the system or plan of operation as may be necessary to perform the dewatering system in an adequate manner. E. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 24 inches below all earthwork, foundations, and compacted surfaces, or as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.05 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND BUILDING AREA A. All debris shall be removed from excavations prior to backfilling and filling. B. Backfill under and around building area shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 12" and shall be compacted as deiined in the soils report or at least to a density equal to 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density as per ASTM D698-70. C. Backfill in electrical plumbing and mechanical trenches shall be compacted to previously specified density_ 3.06 GRADING A. Grade areas to lines and elevations indicated, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish surface within speci�ed tolerances. Compact and bring to uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades. B. Unless shown on the drawings, slope the grade evenly to provide drainage away from the building. C. Complete the grading operations after the building has been finished, utilities installed, site improvements constructed, and all excavated materials, rubbish, and debris removed from the site. Leave grade for lawns and planted areas clean and at required grades. 3.07 TESTING A. A qualified licensed geotechnical testing laboratory shall be retained to perform all necessary quality control testing for earthwork. B. All testing shall comply with the project soils report. C. See structural drawings for a minimum testing program. D. Provide samples of materials proposed for fills as required. Cooperate with laboratory personnel in obtaining samples, and during quality control testing. 3.08 SPECIAL NOT'ES � � � � � � � � � IJ EARTHWORK 02220 - 4 of 5 � � � ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition � A. Fill material shall not be placed against walls until 7 days after grouting of masonry cells. Compaction of exterior fill and interior backfill shall not be performed until wall grout has cured 14 days. � B. Do not use drum compactor within 6 feet of walls. Compaction within 6 feet of walls shall be accomplished with a hand operated vibratory compactor. j i � � 1 � ! 1 � [1 � � EARTHWORK � END OF SECTION 02220 02220 - 5 of 5 CJ ' � � � � L .J � � � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 02361- TERNIITE CONTROL PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUlVIlVIARY A. Section Includes: l. Soil treatment with termiticide. Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include tlie following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Wananty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subtenanean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A_ Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label_ t. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Crroup; Dragnet FT, Talstar, Prevail. � TERMITE CONTROL � 02361 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' d. Syngenta; Demon TC, Prelude, Probuild TC. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatcnent termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treahnent Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D: Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniforrn consistency. Provide quantity - required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical terrniticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building constntction. Distribute treatment evenly. l. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior coluxnn footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect terrniticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION d2361 � � � � � :__l � � TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 of 2 � � ' ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � � � � �_� �` � � � � � � � PART 1 GENERAI, 1_O1 A. 1.02 A. I� 1.03 A. SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RELATED DOCUMENTS Pier 60 Storage Addition Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specifcation sections, apply to this section. DESCRIPTION SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all cast-in-place concrete work, including formwork, reinforcing steel and all related work as shown and speci�ed, except as speciiically excluded hereinafter. 2. In addition to construction of cast-in-place concrete work, the work includes the items listed below: a. Setting anchor bolts, frames, and other items indicated to be embedded in concrete b. Grouting of structural steel bearing on concrete c. Concrete curbs d. �� Dowels for masonry walls e. Concrete walks f. Concrete pavement g. Laboratory field testing services 3. Cooperate with affected personnel or contractors in setting and/or fastening sleeves, piping, inserts, conduits, hangers, ties and similar items in the forms, where such items are to be furnished and installed under other subdivisions of these specifications. RELATED WORK NOT SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Foundations and pads not shown on architectural, civil or structural drawings. 2. Furnishing steel frames and graring. 3. Furnishing miscellaneous steel shapes and plates embedded in concrete. 4. Furnishing anchor bolts for structural steel. 5. Furnishing piping and conduit embedded in concrete. QUALITY ASSURANCE APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1. Provide all materials and perform all work in accordance with the latest issue of ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete A" and the reference specifcations listed therein. 2. The applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following ACI and CRSI Standards are made a part of these specifcations. Where the provisions of any reference speciiication conflict with those of ACI 301, the more stringent provisions govern. � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 1 of l4 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 1.04 A. :. C. PART 2 2.01 ACI NUMBER 302.1R 304.R 304.2R 305R 306R 308 309R 315 318 347 70-56 75-18 Pier 60 Storage Addition TITLE Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete Placing concrete by pumping methods. Hot Weather Concreting Cold Weather Concreting Standard Practice for Curing Concrete Guide for Consolidation of Concrete Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures Building code requirements for reinforced concrete Recommended Pracrice for Concrete Formwork Guide for Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete — Committee 503 Report Concrete committee 503 report. Cold weather concreting. CRSI NUMBER TITLE 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars SUBMITTALS Submit, not less than 21 days prior to placing of concrete, the following proposed concrete mix design data: 1. Intended usage and location for each type 2. Mix design for each type 3. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 4. Coarse and fine aggregate in pounds per cubic yard 5. Water-cement ratio by weight 6. Cement type and manufacturer 7. Slump range 8. Air content range 9. Admixture types and manufacturers 10. Percent of admixtures by weight 11. Strength test data required to establish mix design Submit complete detail and placing shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including accessories that have been reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor. Refer to Section 01300 for al] submittals. PRODUCTS CONCRETE MATERIALS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 of 14 � � � � � � � �� L1 � � � � � � � � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. Type III may be used where authorized by the Engineer. I� C. D. E. F. G. Air-Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C 260, Darax AEA, W. R. Grace & Company, SIKA AER, SIKA, MB-AE90, Master Builders, Air Mix, Euclid Chemical Corp. Water-Reducing Admixtures - ASTM C 494, Type D. WRDA-64, W.R. Grace & Company Plastiment, SIKA, Pozzolith N, Master Builders. No accelerators, retarders or admixtures containing chlorides will be permitted. Use fresh, clean and drinkable water for concrete. For normal weight concrete use coarse and fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33. Super Plasticizer ASTM C494 Type F or G where authorized by the Engineer. H. Fly-ash ASTM C618 Type C618. Maximum loss on ignirion shall not exceed 3% by weight. The combined weight of fly-ash shall not exceed 20 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. The fly-ash present in blended cement conforming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. Do not use for architectural concrete. I. Ground granulated blast-furnish slag ASTM C989. the combined weight of GGBFS shall not exceed 50 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Slag used in blended hydraulic cement con�rming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. 2.02 A. PROPORTIONING Concrete Strength — See structural drawings for minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days. B. PROPERTIES 2.03 /:� : 1. Provide concrete having the general properties specified for each class of concrete with the following tables to provide workability and consistency so concrete can be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation or bleeding, and to provide an average compressive strength adequate to meet acceptance requirements of ACI 301. PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE Concrete must be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications for ready-mixed concrete ASTM C 94. Concrete shall be batched to produce a slump of 4" plus/minus 1". Refer to 2.02B unless noted otherwise. C. Provide at the site, delivery tickets for each batch of concrete showing the following: l. Batch number, volume and date 2. Time of loading 3. Design 28-day compressive strength 4. Concrete type CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 5. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 6. Water content in pounds per cubic yard 7. Admixtures in amount per cubic yard 8. Maximum amount of water that may be added at the job site. D. Restrict the addition of mix water at the job site. Do not add water without the approval of the general contractor and do not exceed slump limitations or total allowable water to cement ratio. Use cold water from the truck tank and remix to achieve consistency. The reports shall indicate how much water was added at the job site. Note on delivery ticket amount of water added and name of person authorizing. E. F. G. H. During hot weather, conform to the detailed recommendations of ACI 305. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degees F., reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degraes, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Concrete should be deposited as neariy as practicable to its �nal position to avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flow�g. Concxeting should be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flowsrea�ly into spaces betwaen reinforcement. I. The use of the following is proh�ited: 1. Partially hardened concrete 2. Contaminated concrete 3. Re-tempered concrete 4. Concrete that has been re-mnced after it has taken its init'ral set. J. K. 2.04 A. After concxeting has been started, it should be carried on as a contumuous opera�ion until plac�g of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed All concrete should be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms_ PLACING CONCRETE GENERAL 1. Inner surfaces of conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete and foreign materials. 2. All reinforcing bars are to be tied in proper position prior to placing concrete. 3. Provide sufficient time for inspection of all preparatory work before proceeding with the placing of concrete. 4. Immediately prior to placing concrete, sprinkle semi-porous sub-grades sufficiently to eliminate suction and seal porous sub-grades, except where a vapor barrier is used. 5. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers continuously, no deeper than 18 inches. Horizontal cold joints will not be permitted. Fill forms completely using methods to ensure even distribution of aggregate around reinforcement and into comers of forms. 6. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degees CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE �J � � � � r � � � �� 03300 - 4 of 14 � � � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � � , LI i � � L_� � , � 7 10. ]1 Pier 60 Storage Addition F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Concrete shall have a wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. Concrete shal] be deposited as near]y as practicable to its final position t o avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing. Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. The following condirions are prohibited: a. Partially hardened concrete. b. Contaminated concrete. c. Re-tempered concrete. d. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set. After concreting has been started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing or a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. B. CONSOLIDATION 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration in accordance with the detailed recommendations of ACI 309. 2. Internal vibrators must be used in beams, girders and framed slabs and along bulkheads or slabs-on-grade to thoroughly consolidate the conerete. Do not use grossly oversized equipment. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. C. � FINISHING 1. Finish concrete slabs in accordance with the finishes and tolerances as speci�ed in ACI 301, and the detailed recommendations in ACI 302. Confirtn all iinishes with Architect. 2. Dusting of slabs with cement or other materials to absorb excess bleed water is strictly prohibited. TOLERANCE ITE LASS FINISH Exterior Pavement B Broom or belt Exterior Walks/Curbs B Fine broom Interior Slabs A Troweled Exterior Steps A � Nonslip 3. For flat, very flat and super flat floors, "F" numbers are required for deiming flatness and levelness. Refer to ACI 301.1R, Fig. 8.15.1.1, for minimum required "F" numbers for type of slab use. NONSLIP FINISH 2 Give surface a dry shake application as specified in ACI 301 using crushed selected abrasive aggregate of aluminum oxide. The rate of application of blended mixture should not be less than 25 pounds per 100 square feet of surface. Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Grip-It L&M Construction Chemicals Frictex N.S. Sonneborn Nonslip Euclid Chemical Co. � CAST-iN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 5 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Emag 20 2.05 REINFORCEMENT A. GENERAL I� C � Pier 60 Storage Addition � Lambert Corp. 1. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not covered herein or shown on drawings to be in accordance with ACI 315. 2. Reinforcement is to be secured in proper position and thoroughly clean of loose rust, scale, grease or other coatings. REINFORCING MATERIALS 1. Unless otherwise indicated, for all reinforcing shown provide deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615, ar a 616 Grade 60. 2. Smooth dowels - ASTM A 615 and A 616, plain bars having a minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Welded wire fabric - ASTM A 185 plain wire fabric in flat sheets. 4. Plain wire to conform to ASTM A 82. 5. Accessories to conform to ACI 315. 6. Where reinforcing rods are used as supports, use rods no lighter than No. 5. 7. Where concrete surfaces are exposed, make those portions of all accessories in contact with the concrete surface or within I/2 inch thereof, of plastic or stainless steel. 8. Reinforcing steel should be free of kinks and non-shop bends. Field bends should be only as approved by the architect. FIBROUS REINFORCING (Synthetic) 1 2. 3. 4. 5_ 6. 7. Reinforcing fibers to be virgin 100% polypropylene fibers, per ASTM C11 l6, specifically manufactured for use in concrete, containing no reprocessed ole�xn materials, with the following minimum physical characteristics: a. specific gravity: 0.91 b. modulus of elasticity: 500-700 KSI c. tensile strength: 70-110 KSI d. fiber length: multi-design gradation, 3/4" maximum. Reinforcing fibers to be supplied by the following approved manufacturers: a. "FIBERSTRAND 100", Euclid Chemical Company b. "FIBERMESH INFORCE e3 or STEALTH e3�, SI Concrete Systems c. "FORTA SUPER-NET", Forta Corporation d. 'NYCON FIBERS", Nycon, Inc. Fibers to be added in manufacturer's approved amount with a minimum of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard for poly and l.0 pounds per cnbic yard for nylon. Concrete to be batched and mixed in accordance with fiber manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion of fiber bundles into single strands within concrete. Reinforcing fibers may be used in concrete slabs-on-grade in lieu of W WF with approval of the engineer. Submit product data for review and approval. For a"non-hairy" surface use a monofilament �ber. Collated fibrillated fibers wear away in a short period of time. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 of 14 � � � ' �� '�I ' � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition D. FIBROUSREINFORCING(alternateto wwfon composite meta� decks) 1. All �bers must meet the criteria in the Steel Deck Institute design man�l (Publicatian No. 30). 2. Cold drawn steel iibers meering the criteria of ASTM A820, at a minimum add8ion rate of 25 Ib/yd3 (14.8 kg/m3) and posaessing an average residual strength of at least 80 psi 550 kpa when tested ASTM C1399, may be used as a suitable alternative to the welded wire fabric speci�ed for temperature and shr�lcage reinforcement. 3. Reinforcing fiber to be s�pplied by the folbwing approved suppliers: a. "NOVOMESH 850, or NOVOCON 1050" by SI Concrete S�stems b. "DRANIIX 65/60" by Bekaert 4. Stee] fibers do not rep]ace reber over girders, which are used to control negative moment. 5. Steel fibers are to be added at the batch plant and in accordance with the man�acturer's recommendations foruniform andcomplete dispersion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING A. GENERAL 2 4. 5. Place reinforcing in conformance with the requirements of CRSI 63. Place. reinforcement in proper position prior to placing concrete. Placing reinforcement during concrete placement will not be permitted. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement as follows: a. Concrete deposited against the ground, 3". b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, 2" for reinforcing bars No. 6 or larger, and 1-1/2" for reinforcing bars No. 5 or smaller. c. Interior surfaces, 1-1/2" for beams, girders and columns, 3/4" for slabs, walls and joists. d See drawing for special conditions. Support reinforcing for slabs-on-grade on staggered concrete bricks or metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers with metal plates. Unless specifically authorized, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete. Support and fasten all dowels in the formwork prior to placing concrete. Do not place dowels after concrete is in place. 3.02 JOINTS A. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 1. Construcrion joints not shown in the contract documents must be located and made to least impair the strength of the stntcture. 2. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted in beams, girders or slabs. 3. Location of any construction joint not shown is subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. 4. Reinforcing is continuous through all construction joints. Obtain bond by roughening surface of concrete in an acceptable manner which will expose � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 7 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � C. 0 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition ' aggregate uniformly and will not leave any latence, loosened particles or aggregate or damaged concrete at surface_ 5. Construction joints shall be cleaned, wetted, and standing water removed. 6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during p]acement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded �xtures and into corners of forms. 7. Concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temp erature. EXPANSION JOINTS Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) will not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. DOWELED SLIP JOINTS 1. Use completely smooth round bars for dowels. 2. For constnzction joints, paint half of bar with red lead paint. When dry, coat painted end with satisfactory grease to insure against bond with concrete. 3. For control joints, paint and grease entire bar. 4. For expansion joints, paint, grease and provide a metal expansion cap for one end. 5. Place in forms to insure that bars are perpendicular to joint face. Stop reinforcement at doweled sl.ip joints so that it will not extend through joint. JOINT MATERIALS 1. Expansion joint filler non-bituminous type - ASTM D 1752, resin impregnated fiberboard Homosote 300 or Thermosetting Polyurethane, W. R. Meadows' Rescor. Asphalt impregnated materials are unacceptable. 2. Polyethylene Film - ASTM D 2103 minimum 6 mil. 3. Horizontal Joint Sealer - 2-component self-leveling urethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Type 1, Class A. Color to match concrete. Acceptable products are : TYPE MANUFACTURER Darasea]-U A. C. Horn Sonolastic SL2 Sonneborn Pourthane W. R. Meadows 4. Vertical Joint Sealer - 1-component Polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-002306, Type II, Class A, color to match concrete. E 6 Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER SIKAFLEX IA SIKA SONOLASTIC NPI Sonneborn Epoxy Joint Sealer - semi-rigid epoxy, MM80 as manufactured by Metzger McGuire Co., master fill 300 by Master Builders. Epoxy Bond - 2-component 100 percent solids epoxy resin, amine cured. Acceptable materials are Concresive Series by Master Builders, Sonneborn=s Epogrip and Epiweld 580 by Lambert Corp. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LJ � L� , � � � � � � ' L_J 03300 - 8 of 14 � � LJ , McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � � Pier 60 Storage Addition 7. Epoxy Grout - Epoxy bond filled with suitable mineral �ller, 100 percent passing the No. 100 sieve, in ratio to insure thixotropic action without impairment of adhesive properties. 8. Compressive Joint Material - expanded polystyrene having a compressive strength not less than 8 psi when the board is compressed to a deformation of 5 percent of its original thickness when tested in conformance with AST'M C 165, modified to change drying temperature to I50°F. 9. Felt - 30 pound asphalt or coal tar roofing felt ASTM D 226 or D 227. � E. PLACING DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE � 1. Use deformed reinforcing bars as dowels. Drill holes in exisring concrete of size 1/2" larger in diameter than the dowel using power-driven drill with tungsten carbide tipped bit ground to insure against oversize hole. Clean out. holes with air � Thoroughly swab surfaces of hole and embedded portion of dowel with epoxy grout. Force dowel into place. Wipe off excess grout and let set for not less than 12 hours at a temperature above 60°F. 3.03 FORMWORK A. GENERAI. � � � � B. � � ' ' , C. 1. Pro�ide and construct formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. 2. Form design by P.E. registered in the State of Florida. 3. Observe and check formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to determine that there are no evidences of changes of elevarions, plumbness, or camber and adjust forms as necessary. If, during construction, any such evidence or other defect appears, stop the work, remove concrete placed, if necessary, and repair formwork or supports before proceeding. 4. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces increase size 2 inch. 5. Forms and shoring is the responsibility of General Contractor. FORMWORK MATERIALS 1. Make forms of lumber, plywood, metal or other materials suitable to provide the strength and tolerances specified herein before and the surface finishes specified hereinafter. 2. Forming exposed surfaces use any of the following materials as suitable for the specified finish, and to produce smooth uniform surfaces, true-to-line, in order that surfaces produced will require little fmishing: a. New plastic-bonded natural plywood, American Plywood Association, HD Overlay Plyform Class I, Ext-APA, or equal. 3. For forming exposed surfaces use plywood, or other nonmetallic surfaces free from knots, warps, breaks, or other defects likely to cause irregular surfaces_ 4. Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with maximum VOC of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments. REMOVAL OF FORMS Forms and shoring in the formwork supporting the weight of concrete, in beams, slabs and other structural elements are to remain in place until the , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 9 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.I2 0 3.04 A. : C. � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' concrete has reached its specified 28-day compressive strength. 2. Formwork and facing forms for members such as grade beams, foundation walls and spread footings not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from the removal operations. 3. Arrange shores and other vertical supports so that the non-load carrying form-facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports. 4. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, continue curing of both the unexposed and exposed concrete by one of the methods specified in secrion "Curing and Protection". REMOVAL STRENGTH 1. Removal Strength - The cancrete will be presumed to have reached its specified strength when additional test cylinders (paid for by contractor) are field cured along with the concrete they represent and have reached the strength specified. REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS GENERAL I holes and repair all honeycombed and defective areas immediately after form removal. 2. For surfaces other than those to be backfilled against, use patching mortar. 3. For surfaces to be backfilled against, use mastic damp-proofing compound, except that where reinforcing is exposed, use patching mortar. 4. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete down to sound concrete prior to patching. Thoroughly clean the holes of dirt and debris. PATCHING MORTAR 1. Cut edges of honeycombed and defective concrete to form dove-tail (undercut) joints. No feather edges will be permitted. 2. Apply a chemical bonding agent to voided surface. An acceptable product is L&M Construction chemicals — Everbond or equivalent. " 3. Patch the cement mortar as specified in ACI 301, or with proprietary patching compounds, except that proprietary patching mixtures may be not used on exposed surfaces. 4. Acceptable proprietary patching mixtures are: a. Euclid Chemical Corporation - Poly Patch b. SIKA - Sikaset Mortar c. Emaco R Series - Master Builders d Lambert Corp, Lambco Vinyi Patch e. Sonneborn - Sonopatch MASTIC DAMP-PROOFING COMPOUND 1. Patch full depth of hole and flush the surface with emulsified asphalt mastic heavy viscosity for trowel application. Prepare and place in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Acceptable products are: a. W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Trowel Mastic b. Euclid Chemical Company - Damp-proofing Asphalt Coatings CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10of14 � � � , McCarthy and Associates 08_ 12 ' � � � � � � � � � � � 3.05 n 3.06 c. Sonnebom - Hydrocide 700 Mastic d. Lambert Corp — Waterban 60M FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES - GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition After removal of forms, give surfaces of concrete the following finishes as specified in ACI 301. SURFACE Unexposed Exposed Exposed to Public View CURING AND PROTECTION A. GENERAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. FINISH Rough Form Smooth Form Smooth Rubbed Conform to the applicable detailed recommendations of ACI 30l and 308. Hot weather curing to be in accordance with applicable ACI Standard 305. All cast-in-place concrete must be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a minimum of 7 days following the placing of the concrete by the use of a water spray, water saturated fabric, moisture retaining membrane or liquid curing compound. Full curing days will be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. Cure slabs-on-grade for the first 72 hours by the use of: a. fog spraying b. ponding c. sprinkling d continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric e. continue curing by use of moisture retaining cover until concrete has obtained its specified 28 day compressive strength f. or liquid curing compound after finishing process is completed. g. concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. Submit materials and method of curing for review. Do not use moisture retaining curing compounds for curing surfaces to receive the following coverings, unless it has been demonstrated that such compounds will not prevent bond of: a. Carpet b. Flexible flooring c. Ceramic tiled floors d. Other specified floor systems B. MATERIALS ' l. Where moisture retaining membranes or curing compounds are used for curing, provide only materials conforming to the following requirements: a. Polyethylene Film - ASTM C171, Type II � b. Waterproof Paper - ASTM C 171, Type I c. Absorptive Cover - AASHTO M 182, Class 3, Burlap cloth made from 3ute or Kenaf or ASTM C 440 cotton mats 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 11 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 d. ASTM C309 spray on at max. G TEMPERATURE, WIND AND HUMIDITY t Pier 60 Storage Addition ' � 1. Do not permit concrete not fully cured to be exposed to excessive temperature changes or high winds. � 3.07 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. GENERAL : 3.08 3. 4. 5. Prior to concreting, place all embedded items to be provided under this subdivision or to be furnished under other subdivisions for installation under this subdivision. Give all contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. Make certain that all embedded items furnished and set in forms by them are secured in position, and exercise due care not to disturb or damage their work while placing concrete. Set anchor bolts for steel and equipment in accordance with setting drawings or templates which have been reviewed and found satisfactory. Where holes in concrete for such purposes as recesses for railing posts, passageways for pipes, and the like are shown formed by sleeves, the contractor may, at his option, provide such holes by drilling with a acceptable diamond or tungsten carbide tipped drill bits. Fill with epoxy seal after railings are in place. EMBEDDED ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Dovetail anchor slots and dovetail brick anchors - DAS-G20 beehive dovetail anchor slot as manufactured by Gateway Building Products, together with DBA-G14 dovetail brick anchors. provide masonry trades with one anchor for each l6" of anchor slot or fraction thereof plus one additional anchor for each vertical section. Place anchor slots 1'-4" on center in beams and walls where masonry abuts and one slot in each face of each column faced with masonry. Furnish anchors to space 16" on center in slots. Plastic reglets for above and below grade counter flashing. Make of Type A ri�d polyvinyl chloride, 0.060" thick, as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. or equal. Sleeves - galvanized steel pipe ASTM A 120, or plastic pipe ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2$52, bituminized fiber pipe conforming to ASTM D 1861 or Wilson anchor bolt sleeve. Column Anchor Bolts - ASTM F 1554. Furnish with one leveling nut plus one nut and one washer. Anchor Bolts — ASTM A 307. As shown on drawings. Cast Iron Frames and Grates - as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company. Castings as manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or McKinley Iron Works may be acceptable, provided the dimensions and design are comparable in all respects. Water stops locations as shown on drawings. VAPOR RETARDER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � � � r . � � � , L� 03300 - 12 of 14 � �� ' � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 r � ' � , � � � � � 2. Pier 60 Storage Addition Provide sub-grade under concrete slabs-on-grade with vapor barrier consisting of polyethylene film not thinner than 10 mils, conforming to ASTM E1745, or asphalt laminated reinforced Kraft paper with polyethylene coating on both sides. Moistop as manufactured by FortiFiber Bui]ding Systems Group. Provide �lm in width and length not less than one foot larger than dimensions of slab sub-grade unless patently impracticable. Lap edges not less than 6" and tape continuously. Take care to avoid puncturing �lm. Immediately prior to placing concrete, tape-seal all tears, cuts and holes. 3.09 GROUTING OF BASE PLATES l. Nonferrous grout acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Crystex L&M Construction Chemicals Five Star U.S. Grout Sonogrout Sonneborn Euco N.S. Euclid Chemical Company Construction Grout Master Builders Vibroprvf #11 Lambert Corp. 2. Mix and place in conformance with printed instructions of the manufacturer. 3.10 TESTING A: GENERAL � � B. � � � 2. 4 The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained for obtaining test specimens and performing quality control work, routine testing of materials or proposed mix designs and of resulting concrete for compliance with technical requirements of specifications. Testing of field-cured test cylinders, or testing required because of changes requested by contractor in materials or proportions of the mix, as well as any extra testing of concrete or materials occasioned by failure to meet specification requirements, to be at contractor's expense. Failure of the testing laboratory to detect any defective work or materials is not in any way to prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor is it to obligate the owner for final acceptance. The testing agency and/or its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the specifications, not to approve or accept any portion of the work, not to act as foreman or perform other duties for contractor. SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE TESTING AGENCY 2 Field Sampling - Secure from different batches, on a truly random basis, composite samples for all field testing required below in accordance with ASTM C 172 where applicable. Take all samples at discharge end of conveying system. Clearly mark each test specimen master as to exact part of the structure represented, class of concrete curing conditions, temperature of concrete, and time and date of sample. Compressive Strength Test - mold and cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and test each cylinder for strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. Take one "test set" consisting of four cylinders for each day's pour of 50 ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � 03300 - 13 of 14 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 3.11 /\ � � Pier 60 Storage Addition � cubic yards, or fraction thereof. Test cylinders one at 7 and two 28 days, one hold. 3. Slump Tests - determine slump range for each "test set" in conformance with ASTM C 143. 4. Air Content Test - determine air content for each "test set" for air-entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231. 5. Submit two copies of the results in each of the above tests and inspection to the contractor and the owner's representative and Engineer. 6. Should any of the test results fail to meet the requirements specified, make an immediate telephone report to the contractor and the owner's representative. 7. Furnish evaluation reports of compression tests as recommended by ACI 214 when any compression test fails to meet the specified strength. 8. Criteria for acceptance of concrete cylinder tests: a) Every arithmetic average of any consecutive three tests equals or exceed fc, and b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) <fc by more than 500 psi. ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE GENERAL 1. Acceptance of structure will be made in conformance with ACI 301, except that contractor must pay all costs incurred for providing any additional testing or analysis required when strength of structure is considered :. potentially deficient. CRACKS 1 2 The contractor will be required to restore without cost to the owner any concrete which develops cracks within a period of one year after placement which has not been caused by action of the owner or others in over stressing the concrete. Repair the cracks by means that will restore the cracked members to their designed strength and appearance by acceptable methods which will not impair the appearance of the affected surfaces, if exposed. Such repairs must be performed by lase of suitable epoxy cements employed by an organization having satisfactorily demonstrated ability in the techniques necessary to effect such repairs, or by other acceptable methods. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14of14 � � L�J , McCarthy and Associates 08_12 � � � � , � r , � � � , � � PART 1 1.01 A. SECTION 03320 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS GENERAL SUMMARY Section includes: precast concrete U-lintels and sills B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Masonry Units 2. Concrete Reinforcement 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 A. B. C. D. 1.03 A. B. 1.04 A. B. 1.05 A. Pier 60 Storage Addition REFERENCES American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C33 — Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C 150 — Specification for Portland Cement Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Standards: Manual for Quality Control for Precast and Pre-Stressed Concrete MNL-I 16. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530) SUBMITTALS Provide manufacturer's catalog engineering data. Manufacturer shall rate U-lintel units for gravity, uplift, and lateral loads in units of pounds per linear foot. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator's Qualifications: Units shall be fabricated by a firm engaged in the manufacturing of precast and pre-stressed concrete U-lintels and sills for a minimum of 5 years. Fabricator shall have a quality assurance program that complies with the procedures of Manual 116 by the Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI). Plant records of production and quality control shall be kept in accordance with PCI recommendations and made available upon request for the Architect DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING If starage is required prior to erection, take all necessary precautions to provide protection to prevent damage prior to installation. Maintain units free of dirt and airbome pollutants until immediately prior to erection. � PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS , 03320- 1 of 2 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition B. Replace all units that are damaged due to mishandling at the job site. PART 2 2.01 A. 2.02 A. B. C�' D. E. F. G. PART 3 3.01 A. 3.02 A. B. PRODUCTS MATERIALS Concrete Materials 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or III, gray color 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 3. Water: Potable 4. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions FABRICATION Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI NINI,-116. All U-lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. All U-lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length skall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be pre-stressed concrete. All sill units shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. All units shall be sand block finish except pre-stressed, 6" wide, and 12" wide U-lintels shall be smooth form fnished. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL-1 I6. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not impaired. EXECUTION FURNISHING Furnish to the concrete masonry unit installer, all units ihat will be installed as part of the work of that section. PROTECTION Protect all stored and installed units from job site debris and impact. Units damaged during storage shall be replaced if beyond repair to restore its structural adequacy. END OF SECTION 0332� PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320- 2 of 2 ' � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 ' � , � , , ' , � ' � � ' � u Pier 60 Storage Addition SECTION 04200 UNIT MAS�NRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment and perform operations necessary for, and incidental to, erection of masonry work. B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 3 section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" C. Products installed but not furnished under this Secrion include the following: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrication". 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 Secrion "Rough Carpentry". 3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section Flashing and Sheet Metal". 4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Secrion "Steel Doors and Frames". 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Secrion "Custom Hollow Metal Work". 6. Sealants 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm): l. fm = 1500 psi on net area. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, manufacturers literature and/or drawings of material that is pre- fabricated or pre-assembled. 1. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 2. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and amangement of masonry reinforcement. 3. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. � UNIT MASONRY � 04200-1 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 1.05 A. ' Pier 60 Storage Addition � 4. Material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each type of masonry unit complies with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard, including fire perfonnance characteristics. 5. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 6. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor. QUALITY ASSURANCE Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6"Specifications for Masonry Structures". B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. � E. 1.06 A. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. The contractor shall retain a qualified testing laboratory to perform the following tests: l. Sample and test.grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 for each 5000 square foot of masonry. 2. Slump tests - ASTM C143. When requested by the Architect/Engineer, a quali�ed testing laboratory shall be retained to perform masonry prism test in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B, modified as follows: 1. Prisms shall be stack bond, one unit long and thick with a full mortar bed. 2. Limit height/thickness ratio from 1.33 - 5.00 3. Provide a minimum of one joint. One set of three (3) prisms prior to construction and during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver masonry material to project in undamaged condition. � � � � , �_� , � � � � � B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to � prevent their deteriorarion or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 of 12 � � � � � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and ' accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS �� i 1 � � ' � ' �' , , ' � � A. Protection of masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. B. Extend cover to minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in pTace. C_ Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. F. G. H. I. PART 2 2.01 Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of covering spread on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finish from mortar droppings. Hot weather constnzction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. GENERAi� MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements speciiied in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY LTNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry required. B. Masonry Units for Fire-Rated Walls 1. Provide fire-rated units which are rated product of manufacturer listed in latest revision of building materials list, published by UL. In lieu of above rating, fumish fire resistive units on basis of examination, tests and report by nationally recognized tesring agency acceptable to goveming authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Report must state that units proposed to be fumished are equivalent in �re rating to those products furnished by producers in above UL building materials list. , iJ1VIT MASONRY � 04200-3 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition C. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. D. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specifed dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. E F G. H. 2.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.04 Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units. Exposed faces: Manufacturer`s standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: l. Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Use inspecrion and cleanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout pour heights in ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.SC with Table 7. See Florida Building Code page 35.1 Weight classification: Normal weight MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Mortar - Type M or S Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color. Ready-mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Aggregate for mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than l/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404. Water: Clean and potable. REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coaring class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 of 12 � � McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and , plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). �� , , � � � ' ' ' � C1 ' � _J , �_ i �� ' C� � For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. 2. Number of side rods for multi wythe concrete masonty: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches or less in nominal width. E. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches O.C., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1 /2" inches. F G. 2.05 A. B. C. Use units with adjustable two piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup by more than and where indicated. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AA Wire Products/Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America TIES AND ANCHORS General: Provide ties and anchors specifed in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and this article. Galvanized carbon steel wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masoruy standard for applicarion indicated. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch. D. Galvanized heavy thickness steel sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot-rolled carbon steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B3, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch and greater. E. Steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. ITNIT MASONRY 04200-5 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � F. Available manufacturers: Sub}ect to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur-O-WaI, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Bamard, Inc. 2.06 A. : C. 2.07 WORK BENT WIRE TIES Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Tie shape for hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes align: Unit ties bent from one piece of wire. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes does not align: Adjustable ties composed of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment 2-1/4 inches. ADNSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL A_ General: Two piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisring tension and compression forces perpendicular to it_ B. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular shaped wire ties section seized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: 1. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.08 � MISCELLANEOUSANCHORS Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and sized indicated. B. Dovetail slots: Furnished dovetail slots, with filler strips, or slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal. 2.09 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capacity to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Chemical anchors 2. Type: Expansion anchors UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 of 12 C� ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition , B. Corrosion protection: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5(5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). � , , f_1 � � ' ' ' � �� ' � � � � C. f� 2.10 For cast-in-place and post-installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry. For post-installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Non-metallic expansion joint strips: Pre-molded fller strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2{closed cell), Class A(cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with specifc resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1(compression deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: : C. 2.11 A. B. 1. Neoprene 2. Urethane 3. Polyvinyl chloride Pre-formed control joint gaskets: Materials as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene rubber compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC- 65406 Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated organic roofng felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt). MASONRY CLEANERS Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water, mixed in a non-metallic container with acid added to water. C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents. E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. iJNIT MASONRY 04200-7 of 12 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition F. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be used to clean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent", ProSoCo, Inc. 2. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent", ProSoCo, Inc. 3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol", ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 A. B. C. D. 2.13 A. . PART 3 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish pre- construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below: l. TypeMorS Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Concrete masonry unit'tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, ' absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140, if required by Architect. EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. 3.02 A. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATiON - GENERAL Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of 5 minutes after addition of all materials. B. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thiclaiess of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades. UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 of 12 � � � ' McCarthy and Associates 08_12 Pier 60 Storage Addition , D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. LJ , L� J , � f_J ' � ' � � ' ' E. F. G. 3.03 A. 3.04 Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions. Use full size units without cutting where possible. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A. LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. : C. Lay up walls to comply with. specified construction tolerances, wiih courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other consmtction. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bounded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3 unit length for one -third ninning bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F G. Re-temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun or after 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. Built-in work: As construcrion progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items_ ' H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. ' LTNIT MASONRY 04200-9 of 12 CI McCarthy and Associates 08.12 K. 3.05 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition , Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of inetal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. Reinforced vertical concrete blocks cells, grouting solid where indicated on plan. MOKTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to ce�ls or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT ' u L�J ' ' A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 ' inch of exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or intemtpt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise � indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated °L" and "T" sections. Cut and bed reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. � 3.07 A 3.08 Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at doors and windows for first and second block course above and below apertures. Run reinforcing continuous or extend two feet from aperture edge. ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 26 inches o.c. horizontally. MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS A_ General: InstaIl controI and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or parrition movement. UNIT MASONRY 04200-10 of 12 � , ' � � , �J i ' � ' ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 r ' ' �� fc � • A. Pier 60 Storage Addition Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond breaker strips on in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the joint with mortar and rake joints in exposed faces. LINTELS Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for , brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide reinforced precast concrete lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. , ' � � ' u � ' � , C. 3.10 A. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements or referenced unit masonry standard_ Temporary formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during constnzction. Contractor is completely responsible for the proper design and construction of all temporary forms and bracing. C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construcrion and curing of reinforced masonry. I� E. 3.11 Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. REPAIRING, POTNTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. ' C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: , iTNIT MASONRY 04200-11 of 12 ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1!2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet all surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A. TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 04200 iTNIT MASONRY 04200-12 of 12 ' ' i� �1 � , ' ' ' , ' � ' � ' , , ' APA 08.12 SECTION 05521 - PIPE RAILINGS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l. Aluminum pipe railings. Pier 6d Storage Addition 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of SO lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 2001bf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of SO lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. S. applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other fonms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout and anchoring cement. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Aluminum Pipe Railings: a. AlumaGuard Corp. b. ATR Technologies, Inc. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. e. CraneVeyor Corp. f. Hollaender Manufacturing Company. g. Moultrie Manufacturing Company. h. Pisor Industries, Inc_ i. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc. j. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. k. Tl�ompson Fabricating, LLC. 1. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. m. Tuttle Aluminum & Bmnze. , PIPE RAILINGS � 05521 - i of 2 APA 08.12 n. Wagner, R& B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. ' Pier 60 Storage Additiou � 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and fnish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 1. Extruded Structural Pipe: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for tliis purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction by bending. � D. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of inember throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 2.5 FINISHES A. Aluminum: 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M 12C22A41 complying with AAMA 611 _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. INSTALLATION General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet 2_ Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediatety after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2_ Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECi'ION 05521 PIPE RAILINGS � � u ' ' �-, �� ' , ' ' � u � ' ' 05521 - 2 of 2 ' � ' ' APA 08.12 � u � ' � ' , , ' CI ' � � , ' SECTION 05720 — ALUNIINUM LIFT OUT RAILING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Pier 60 Storage Addition A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUIVIMARY A. This section includes the following: l. Aluminum lift out railing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: AA 30, "Specifications for Aluminum Structures." B. Structural Performance: Provide railing capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress of materials for railing, anchors, and connections: 1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft_ applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of I OO lbf/ft. applied vertically downward. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. : 2. Infill area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 2001bf applied to 1 sq. ft. at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area. a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in determining stress on guard. 1.4 SUBNIITTALS A. Product Data: For manufacturers product lines of railing assembled from standard components. 1. Include Product Data for grout, anchoring cements, and paint products. B_ Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of railing. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples for Inirial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for products with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Short sections of railing or flat sheet metal Samples showing available mechanical finishes. E. Samples for Verification_ For each type of exposed finish reyuired, prepared on components indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each different linear railing member, including handrails and top rails. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Samples of railings, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project , ALUMIIWM LIFT OUT RAILING � 05720 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Product Test Reports: Indicating products comply with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 A ].6 A QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. STORAGE Store railing in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight place. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Wark, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinated installation of anchorages for railing. Furnish Setting Drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver-such items to Project site in time for installations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 1. Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063-TS/T52. 2. Extruded Shuctural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429, alloy 6063-T632. 3. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B210 (ASTMB 210M), alloy 6063-T632. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 5052-H32. 5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B247 (ASTM B 247 M), alloy 6061T6. 6. Castings: ASTM B 26B 26M, alloy A 356-T6. C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide cast brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide formed or cast brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. Provide formed steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and wit2� snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 4. Provide brackets with interloclang pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. ALUMINUM LIFT OUT RAILTNG , ' � � � , � , ' ' � � ' ' ' ' � 05720 - 2 of 4 ' l_ I , , APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 2.2 FASTENERS � A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railing to other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings of other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. t 2.3 � � r— ,�� ._ r- � � � �� ' ' A. B. C. D. E. F. H. FABRICATION Assemble railing in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Mechanical Connections: Fabricate railing by connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect railing members to other construction. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect railing to concrete or masonry. Fabricate ancborage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railing. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove buns from exposed cut edges. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components as indicated to receive finisb hardware, screws, and similar items. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted rails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of . returns, unless clearance between end of railing and .wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for.4rchitectural and metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ' 2.5 ALIJMINLTM FINISHES A. Finish: Bronze anodized aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION � , IJ � 3.I EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not akeady done. 3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installing railing Set railing accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. , ALUMINUM LIFT OUT RAILING ' 05720 - 3 of 4 APA 08. T 2 C `i7 E. � Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m) Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and copper alloys that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, witli a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joint's Space posts to interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. Fastening to In-Place Constxuction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railing and for properly transferring loads to in-place constxuction. 3.3 RAILINGS CONNECTIONS A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and appoint exposed areas with same material. 3.5 PROTECTION A. �Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and constxuction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in feld to shop; make requires alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units_ END OF SECTION 05720 ALUMINUM LIFT OUT RAILING � ' � ' � � " � , � ' ' , ' , ' 05720 - 4 of 4 , , ' � ' � � � � ' � � � � ' � I� � � ' � , II APA 0812 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUIVIlVIARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. PART2-PRODUCTS Pier 60 Storage Addition 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under tbe rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no • arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisteire content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions. 2. Species: a. Southern pine; SPIB. b. Douglas fir-south; W WPA. c. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, tom grain, and wane: 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. ROUGH CARPENT'RY 06100 -1 of 2 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 3. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 A. : FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specif ed in this article for material and manufacture. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprebensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Metal framing anchors shall be stainless steel. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. I. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit_ Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. E. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 of 2 � � ' � ' � 1 � � � ' � ' � � l�J , � APA 08.12 SECTION 06160 — SHEATHING PA.RT 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatmen� PART2-PRODUCTS Pier 60 Storage Addition 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: DFPA CD with exterior glue. 2.2 ROOF SIIEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: DFPA CD with exterior glue. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steei. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated in Structural Specifications. D. Coordinate roof sheathing installation witb flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. END OF SECTION 06160 ISHEATHING � 06160 - 1 of 1 � � , � L1 , � i � � � �' � APA 08.12 SECTION 06164 — GYPSUM SHEATHING PARTl-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fiberglass-mat faced, moisture and mold resistant gypsum sheathing_ B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 1.2 � � � CES A. ASTM Intemaxional (ASTM): 1. ASTM C473 Standasd Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. 2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-Sta.te Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 3. ASTM C1002 Standazd Speci�cation for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 4. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 5. ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 6. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 7. ASTM D6329 Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for Evaluating the Ability of Indoor Materials to Support Microbial Growth Using Static Environmental Chambers. 8. ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 9. ASTM E96 Standazd Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. B. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-253 Applica.tion of Gypsum Sheathing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data.: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. 1.4 A : WARRANTY Pmvide products that offer twelve months of coverage against in-place exposure damage (delamination, deterioration and decay). Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. Five years against manufachiring defects. 2. Ten years against manufacturing defects when used as a substrate in architecturally specified EIFS. , PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: , 1_ Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: DensGlass Sheathing. 2.2 MATERIALS � A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. � GYPSUM SHEATHING � 06164 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition i 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Weight: 1.9 Ib/sq. ft. 5. Edges: Squaze. 6. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not less than 540 pounds per square foot, dry. 8. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, parallel. 9. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C 1177): Not more than 2/8 inch. 10. Permeance (ASTM E96): 23 perms. 11. R Value (ASTM C518): 0.56. 12. Mold Resista.nce (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufaciured. 13. Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, GREENGUARD 3-week protocol): Will not support microbial growth. 14. Acceptable Products: a. 1/2 inch DensGlass Sheathing, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Screws: ASTM C1002, corrosion resistant treated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 E.XAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates aze acceptable, to the installer, to begin installation of work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: In accordance with GA-253, ASTM C1280 and the manufacturer's recommendations. l. Manufacturer's Recommendations: a. Current "Product Catalog", Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06164 GYPSUM SHEATHING r � � ' � � � � � �� 06164-2of2 � , ' ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 , � � � � � � � � O � , � � � Pier 60 Storage Addirion SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAI, 1.O1 RELATED DOCLTMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services for fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all wood trusses shown and specified to include the following: a. Gable-shaped trusses. b. Hip and girder trusses at hip ends of roof. c. Scissors trusses. d. Monopitch trusses. e. Parallel chord 4 x 2 wood trusses. f. Piggy back misses. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision: l. Roof sheathing is specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" or on the structural drawings. 2. Setting anchor bolts, cast-in-concrete or masonry. 3. Pressure treated lumber. 1.03 DEFINITTONS A. Prefabricated metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of inetal-plate-connected members that are fabricated from dimension lumber and that have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project site. ] .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Publication l. Western Wood Products Association Publication: Standard Grading Rules For Western Lumber. 2. National Forest Products Association Publication: National Design Specification for Stress Graded Lumber and its Fastenings 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standards: Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for pouglas Fir, West Coast Hemlock, Sitka Spruce, White Fir, and Westem Red Cedar Lumber, No. 16 4. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber 5. Southern Forest Products Association. ' PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES � 06192-1 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition B. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: C�J � E 1. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses." 3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses." 4. "Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses." 5. "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Connector Plate Manufacture." Wood Structural Design Standard: Gomply with applicable requirements of N.F.P.A. "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by the metal plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer. F. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized ta practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. G. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements for quality control and is experienced in prefabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project that have a record of successful in-service performance: Fabricator participates in a recognized quality assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute; or other independent inspection and testing agency acceptable t o Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. H. Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. I.O S SUBMITTALS A. Product data for lumber, metal connector plates, hardware, fabrication process, and fasteners. � B. Shop drawings indicating species, species group, sizes, and stress grades of lumber t o be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design values, and location of inetal connector plates; and bearing details. 1. To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, include design analysis indicating loading, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations, shop drawings and other information PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES � � ' � � � � � � �� 06192-2 of 5 � �I � ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 , � � � r ' � � � � � � �� C. D. 1.06 A. 1.07 A. PART 2 2.01 A. 2.02 A : C. D, Pier 60 Storage Addition needed for review that have been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Product certificate, signed by officer of fabricating iirm, certifying that metal- plate-connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overiurning, or other cause which trusses are not designed to resist or endure. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PRODUCTS CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector plates that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Connectors 2. Hughes Manufacturing. 3. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc_ 4. Bemax of Florida, Inc. LUMBER Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill, and grading agency. Lumber Standard: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Soflwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with requirements indicated below: I. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species group as defined in Table 8.1a of N.F_P.A National Design Specification, for extreme fiber stress in bending "Fb" for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity "E": � PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES � 06192-3 of 5 McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition a. Group II species, "Fb" of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for repetitive member use, and "E" of 1,600,000 psi. 2.03 A. B. 2.04 A. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES General: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with requirements indicated in this article. Exterior Coastal Areas: Stainless steel, Type 316L. FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements speci�ed in this article for material and manufacture. 1. With stainless steel connector plates, provide fasteners per AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1 _ E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts comptying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, iIat washers. 2.05 A. METAL FRAM�NG ANCHORS Generai: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 2. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which reports exist from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of inetaI framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 3. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a quali�ed independent tesring laboratory. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, Grade A(structural quality); ASTM A 653 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated. B. Assemble truss members in design configurarion indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with full-bearing joints closely fitted, particularly at peak heel joints, to comply with tolerances specified in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." Position members to produce design camber indicated. C. Connect mxss members by means of inetal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 1 � ' , � � , ' � � � � , i � 06192-4 of 5 � � l_ JI� � ' � � � � � � � � � � � i � # 1 ' McCarthy and Associates 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with applicable requirements of referenced TPI standards. B. Where trusses do not fit, return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of correct size; do not alter trusses in the field. C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. D. Joist trusses in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION 06192 PRE-FAB METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-5 of 5 ' ' APA 08.12 , i , � ' � � � � � ' � � �� SECTION 06462 — HARDIE RUSTIC TRIM BOARDS PARTI-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber cement paneLs, single, trim, fascia, moulding and accessories, James Hardie HZI d Engineered for Climate Siding. 2. Factory-finished fiber cement panels, single, trim, fascia, moulding and accessories, James Hardie HZI O Engineered for Climate Siding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Tool and Tape. B. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Fumace at 750 degrees C. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cementitious siding rriaterials which are outside the scope of the standard details and . specifications provided by the manufacturer. D. Selecrion Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by I 50 mm), representing actual product, color, and pattems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. B. Installer Qualificarions: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architec� 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until worlananship, color, and sheen are approved by Architec� 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authoriries having jurisdiction. � HARDIE RUSTIC TRIM BOARDS , 06462 - ] of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 5torage Addition 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recoznmended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty. 1. HardieTrim HZ10 boards for 15 years. B. Finish Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing finish defects. 1. When used for its intended purpose, properly installed and maintained according to Hardie's published installation instructions, James Hardie's ColorPlus finish with ColorPlus Technology, for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase: will not peel; will not crack; and will not chip. Finish warranty includes the coverage for labor and material. C. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: A. James Hardie Building Products, Inc., La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691 Toll Free Tel: 866-274-3464; Tel: 949-367-4980 Email: request info (info@jameshardie..com) Web: www jameshardiecommer.cial.com B. Subsritutions: Not permitted. 2.2 TRIM A. HardieTrim HZ10 5/4 Rustic boards as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Wood Framing Fasteners: 1. Corrosion resistant nails, size as recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1. Primer: Factory applied sealer/primer by James Hardie. 2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule. B. Factory Finish: Refer to Exterior Finish Schedule. 1. Product: ColorPlus Technology by James Hardie. 2. Definition_ Factory applied finish; defined as a finish applied in the same facility and company that manufactures the siding substrate. 3. Process: a. Factory applied finish by fiber cement manufacturer in a controlled environment within the fiber cement manufacturer's own facility utilizing a multi-coat, heat cured finish within one manufacturing process. b. Each finish color must have documented color match to delta E of 0.5 or better between product lines, manufacturing lots or production runs as measured by photospectrometer and verified by third party. 4. Protection: Factory applied finish protection such as plastic laminate that is removed once siding is installed. , , ' � I� � � , � � � � � ' � ' � � HARDIE RUSTIC TRIM BOARDS 06462 - 2 of 4 � ' ' ' � � L_J � � LJ � � � � � � u , � � APA 08.12 5. Pier 60 Storage Addition Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre-packaged touch-up kit provided by fiber cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Nominal2 inch by 4 inch (51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3. Protect siding from other trades. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by tbe manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Install a water-resistive barrier is required in accordance with local building code requirements. D. The water-resistive barrier must be appropriately installed with penetration and junction flashing in accordance with local building code requirements_ E. Install Engineered for ClimateT'M HardieWrapTM weather barrier in accordance with local building code requirements. F. Use HardieWrapTM Seam Tape and joint and laps. G. Install and HardieWrapTM flashing, HardieWrapTM Flex Flashing. 33 IN5TALLATION — HARDIE TRIM HZ10 BOARDS A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install flashing around all wall openings. B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must penetrate minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) or full thiclaiess of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security. C. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch (19 mm) and no fiu-ther than 2 inches (51 mm) from side edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch (25 mm) from end. Fasten maximum 16 inches (406 mm) on center. D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade. E. Trim inside comer with a single board trim both side of comer. F. Outside Comer Board Attach Trim on both sides of comer with 16 gage corrosion resistant finish nail 1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart, weather cut each end spaced minimum 12 inches (305 mm) apart. G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding. H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk. I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.. J. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints. K. Overlay siding with single board of outside comer board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten HardieTrim boards to HardieTrim boards. L. Shim frieze board as required to align with comer trim. � HARDIE RUSTIC TRIM BOARDS � 06462 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition M. Install HardieTrim Fascia boards to rafter tails or to sub fascia. 3.4 FINISHING A. Finish unprimed siding with a minirnum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer and one coat of either, 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoats or two coats high quality alkali resistant 100 percent acrylic or latex, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. B. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of bigh quality 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project� B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06462 HARDIE RUSTIC TRIM BOARDS 06462 - 4 of 4 � ' , APA 08.12 SECTION 06463 — HARDIE SOFFIT PANELS AND BATTENS PART 1 - GENER.AL Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Artisan Matrix Panel, a cementitious express/reveal jointed panel with accessories. , � � � � � ' �� , ' � 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specifcation for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Sheets. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E 119 - Standarc3 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. F. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. G. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure. H. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference_ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on eacb product to be used, including: 1. Prepararion instructions and recommendations_ 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Best Practices Building Guide. 4. Technical data sheet. B. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cementitious siding materials which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the manufacturer. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. D. Verifcation Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and pattems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products and listed by James Hardie as a 1H Preferred Installation Company. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until worlananship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. � HARDIE SOFFIT PANELS AND BATTENS � 06463 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 1.5 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and comers from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local autUorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 PR03ECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Artisan Matrix Panel Limited Product Warranty: 30-year limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANiTFACTURER: A. 3ames Hardie Building Products, Inc., La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691 Toll Free Tel: 866-274-3464; Tel: 949-367-4980 Email: request info (info@jameshardie.com) Web: www jameshardiecommercial.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 2.3 Soffits A. Hardie 1/4" non vented in Cedarnull Finish B. Hardie 1/4" vented in Cedarnull Finish C. Hardie Rustic Battens D. Sealant: Joint Sealant complying with ASTM C920 Grade NS, Class 25 or higher or a Latex Joint Sealant complying with ASTM C834. FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Attaching James Hardie Batten Boards: 1. Wood Framing: Siding nail, 0.092 inch shank by 0.222 inch HD by 2.5 inches long. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1. Primer: Factory applied sealer/primer by James Hardie. 2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until subslxates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Nominal2 inch by 4 inch (51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use ofwater-resistive barriers or vapor HARDIE SOFFIT PANELS AND BATTENS � � � �� ' ' � �J �� 06463 - 2 of 4 ' ' ! � APA 08.12 ' ' � � L� J , � � � � r ' , u Pier 60 Storage Addition barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siciing. 3. Protect siding from other trades. D. Minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) C-Stud t 6 inches maximum metal framing complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, ofuniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3. Protect siding from other trades. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. INSTALLATION Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from panel edges and 2 inches (51 mm). fmm panel comers. Install cavity vent strips along the bottom edge of framing or sheathing. Install furring over sheathing attaching to framing members. Apply caulking over furring. Only apply enough caulking for one panel at a time_ Install first panel at the bottom corner working across and up. Ensure panels are square and level. Fasten bottom half of panel. Apply caulking to horizontal "T" backing strip and insert over top of panel just installed_ Install second panel using 1/2 inch (13 mm) spacers at vertical joints. Fasten bottom half of second panel and finish attaching first panel. Install a kickout flashing to deflect water away from the siding at the roof intersecrion. Install a self-adhering membrane on the wall before the subfascia and trim boards are nailed in place, and then install the kickout. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the bottom edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. All field cut edges shall be primed or sealed during the installation process using an exterior grade primer or sealer which is compatible with the type of paint to be used. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to the applicable building code compliance reports. 3.4 FINISHING A. Finish unprimed siding with a minimum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer and one coat of 100 percent acrylic, exterior grade topcoats within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. B. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality 100 percent acrylic exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manuf'acturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. � HARDIE SOFFIT PANELS AND BATTENS , 06463 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06463 HARDIE SOFFIT PANELS AND BATTENS 06463 - 4 of 4 ' ' APA 08.12 ' SECTION 07200 — ROOF PENETRATION CURBS PARTI-GENERAL , 1.1 � , r 1 u , , , � ' � ' � A. � D_ E. F G Pier 60 Storage Addition WORK CONDITIONS Do not apply the Pro Pack two part urethane pourable sealer if rain is expected within four hours after application time. 1-Part Pourable Sealer is not adversely affected by rain immediately after application. The roof surface should be dry during installation. Do not apply Pro Pack two part urethane pourable sealer below 40° F(4° C). Cold temperatures can result in slow or incomplete cure. Do not apply over wet or oily surfaces, or uncured concrete. Do not apply direcdy to smooth surfaced A.P.P. modified bitumen products. A piece of granulated A.P.P. shall be installed around the roof penetration that will extend beyond the ChemCurb a minimum of 2" in all directions. This will provide a proper surface for bonding. Do not install ChemCurbs on TPO membranes without CHEM LINK TPO Primer. TPO Primer must be used to obtain proper bonds. Under no circumstances shall ChemCiirbs be installed on Hypalon membranes. Do not use roof cement for nigbt seals around roof penetrations. Roof cement is incompatible with CHEM LINK pourable sealants. Apply a bead of M-1 Structural Sealant around the base of each roof penetration to provide a temporary seal. Also, do not prime penetrations with asphalt primer. Apply additional M-1 Structural Sealant to the cleaned penetration, extending from the base of the penetration to a minimum of 3"above the Base. Tool the M-1 smooth. M-1 shall be applied to new penetrations in the same manner. In many instances, asphalt roof mastics and other sealants have been applied to the roof penetrations that extend above the profile of a ChemCurb. These sealants can act as a bond breaker and cause the Pro Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer to separate from the penetrations. It is imperative that the contractor remove as much of the contaminants as possible. The M-1 will act as a primer for the Pro Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer and will seal any residual contaminants that could adversely affect the pourable sealants. In order to give the M-1 sufficient time to cure, it is recommended that the M-1 (as a primer) be applied to the penetrations before the ChemCurbs are set in place and the Pro Pack is mixed. If large rectangular ChemCurbs are being installed, allow the M-1 to set and gain strength for a minimum of 1 hour before filling the ChemCurb. PART Z- DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Examine all ChemC�rb packages and containers upon delivery to make sure they are not damaged. Do not use any unlabeled products. If any products are unlabeled, notify CFiEM LINK at (800)-826-1681. B. If ChemCurb products are stored in an unheated area during freezing conditions, make sure they are brought to room temperature 24 hours before use. The shelf life of unopened containers is one year from batch date printed on cans. C: Do not expose any of the ChemC�rb products to moisture during storage. PART 3- CHEMCURB STANDARD SIZES AND ACCESSORIES A. Standard ChemCurb sizes are 7.5" i.d. and 5" i.d. round curbs. Each ChemCurb is 2" high. B. ChemCurb Straights are available in 6" and 12" lengths. These are used to make the ChemCurb longer. The 6" and 12" sections fit both the 7.5"i.d. and the 5"i.d. curbs. � ROOF PENETRATION CURBS u 07200 —1 of 5 APA 0812 C D. E. ' Pier 60 5torage Addition ' ChemC�trb Corners are used to make box shaped curbs. Used with the Straights, ChemCurbs can be made to your own size specifcations right on the job site. If multiple penetrations are present in one ChemCurb, a 1" space should be maintained between penetrations and the inside edge of the ChemCurb. ChemCurbs are made of weather and U.V. resistant gray polyester resin. Fitting cuts to any of the ChemCurb sections can be easily done with a power saw and masonry blade. Eye protection shall be worn while cutting at all times. PART 4 - SURFACE PREPARATION 4.1 SINGLE-PLY (E.P.D.M., P.V.C. etc.) All dirt, dust and other contaminants such as, but not limited to, water, ice, oil, grease, animal fat and indusfial solvents shall be thoroughly cleaned away from the application area. Wipe the area with denatured / 100% rubbing alcohol and allow drying. Do not use splice wash or gasoline. NOTE: DO NOT USE CHEMCURBS ON TPO MEMBRANES WITHOUT CHEM LINK TPO PRIMER. TPO PRIMER SHAI,L BE APPLIED FROM THE BASE OF THE PENETRATION EXTENDING BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE CHEMCURB, ONE INCH IN ALL DIRECTIONS. TPO PRIMER WILL NOT WORK ON HYPALON MEMBRANES. CHEMCURBS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON HYPALON MEMBRANES UNDER ANY GIRCUMSTANCES. 4.2 4.03 GRANULATED S.B.S AND A.P.P MODIFIED BITUMEN As described above in section 4.01, prepare the surface of the application area as described in that section. Due to the texture of the granulated surface, the ChemCurb can be applied directly to the granulated surface of the membrane. It is not required to clean the surface of the membrane with denatured/rubbing alcohol. Due to poor granule adhesion, 1-Part Pourable Sealer sbould be used exclusively when installing ChemCurbs on any granulated membrane. NOTE: APPLY A VERY THIN BEAD OF M-1 STRUCTURAL SEALANT TO THE OUTSIDE BASE OF THE CHEMCI7RB AND TOOL IT SMOOTH, MAKING SURE TO SEAL ALL VOIDS AND GAP5. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A BEAD OF 1-PART POURABLE SEALER (APPLIED FROM 28 OZ. CARTRIDGE) BE APPLIED OVER TOP OF THE BEAD OF M-I. THE 1-PART POURABLE SEALER WILL HELP OBTAIN PROPER GRANULE ADHESION. 4.3 PENETRATIONS INSIDE THE CHEMCURB With a wire brush and scraper, thoroughly clean and remove all loose roof cement, mastics, coatings, scaled rust and caulking that may be adhered to the penetrations inside the ChemCurb. If any fresh roof cement is present, it must be removed completely. These products act as a contaminant and will adversely affect tbe bonding of the new sealant that will be applied. As an additional precaution, apply M-1 Structural Seatant around the penetration starting at the base of the penetration. Tool the M-1 smooth around the entire circumference of the penetration(s), extending a minimum of 3" above the roof surface, or beyond the point where any mastics or sealants may have been previously applied. Tool the M-1 smooth to an approximate thickness of 1 /8". ROOF PENETRATION CURBS ' , ' , r ' � ' ' , � � ' , � 07204 — 2 of 5 ' ' , , APA 08.12 ' ' Pier 60 Storage Addition NOTE: DO NOT PRIME ANY PENETRATIONS INSIDE TAE CHEMCURB WITH ASPHALT PRIMER. THIS CAN ADVERSELY AFFECT THE BONDING PROPERTIES OF THE NEW SEALANT. PART 5-APPLICATION OF THE CHEMCURB 5.1 PRIMING , In order to prevent water infiltration at the roof penetration, apply a bead of CHEM LINK M-1 Structural Sealant around the base of atl penetrations that are inside the ChemCurb. Apply additional M-1 to the penetrations, starting at tbe base and extending a minimum of 3" above ' the roof or 1/2" above the point where previous sealants may have been installed. Tool the M-1 smooth, covering the entire circumference of the penetration(s). DO NOT USE ROOF CEMENT! , 5.2 INSTALLATION , � � ' , l_J� If necessary (on a large ChemCurb) pre-cut the ChemCurb Accessory Straights and set them in place "dry" with the ChemCurb Corners around the penetration/s to ensure a proper fit. On standard-sized ChemCurbs there will only be two pieces that will form a circle. Hold the frst section (or curved section) of the ChemCurb "flat side up", and apply a 1/4" bead of M-1 Structural Sealant to the entire bottom perimeter and an additional bead down the center of the ChemCurb section. M-1 shall also be applied to the scarf joints. Place the freshly treated section into place on the prepared surface, and press it�down firmiy. Apply M-1 to the second section (or succeeding sections for large ChemCurbs) as described above. Press the sections together and down firmly. Apply additional M-1 to any voids. Neatly tool any excess M-1 that extrudes from the scarf joints. NOTE: ALWAYS MAINTAIN A DISTANCE OF 1" BETWEEN PENETRATIONS AND THE INSIDE EDGE OF THE CHEMCURB IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A PROPER SEAL. � 5.3 , ' When tbe entire ChemCurb is assembled and pressed into place, a 1/4" round continuous bead of M-1 Structural Sealant shall be applied around the outside base of the ChemCurb. All joints and seams shall be tooled to a smooth finish with the applicator stick that is included with each ChemCurb case. When installing ChemCurbs on granulated membranes, a thin bead of M-1 shall be applied to the outside of the ChemCurb and tooled smooth. An additional bead of 1- Part Pourable Sealer should be applied (using 28 oz. Cartridges) over the M-1 to ensure proper granule adhesion. TWO-PART PRO PACK As per mixing instructions on the ChemCurb Pro Pack, mix parts "A" and "B" for a minimum of five minutes, until they become a uniform black. Pour Pro Pack pourable sealant into the ChemCurb until it is completely flush with the top of the ChemCurb. Do not apply Pro Pack if rain is expected within four hours. � - ROOF PENETRATION CURBS ' 07200 — 3 of 5 APA 08.12 5.4 5.5 1-PART POURABLE SEALER u Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1-Part Pourable Sealer can be used instead of Pro Pack in any Chem Curb. This product is available in 28oz. cartridges, or in two-liter pouches. This product does not require any mixing and unused portions can be sealed and used on future projects. Due to poor granule adhesion, 1-Part Pourable Sealer should always be used in ChemCurbs installed on granulated surfaces or on any roof penetration that is subjected to extreme movement. ROOF WITH MULTIPLE CHEMCURBS On a roof that has many ChemCurbs to be installed, it can be faster to install the sections of several ChemCnrbs and then fill them all at once. This can help reduce the possibility of having unused Pro Pack pourable sealant left in a can. Make sure all temporary seals around the roof penetrations were sealed with M-1 Structural Sealant. NOTE: DO NOT USE ROOF CEMENT FOR TEMPORARY SEALS. When assembling large rectangular ChemCurbs, allow the M-1 Structural Sealant to cure for a minimum of 1 hour before filling the ChemCurb with Pm Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer. This will prevent any of the curb sections from rupturing due to the hydrostatic pressure of the large volume of pourable sealer. ChemCurbs caII lie made in any size or shape using ChemCurb straights and/or corners. There is no maximum size limit to a ChemCurb. 5.6 POSITIVE SLOPE INSTALLATION/PIPES THROUGH A VERTICAL WALL It is imperative to maintain the 2"depth of the sealer inside the entire ChemCurb. This can be accomplished by installing the ChemCurb around the penetxation according to normal installation specifications. On pipes extending through a vertical wall, it is imperative to apply the external bead of M-1 Structural Sealant around the outside base perimeter and tool it quickly. The M-1 on the bottom of the curbs sections and the external bead of M-1 will hold the ChemCurb in place. Fill the entire ChemCurb with CHEM LINK's low rnodulus DuraLink sealant. Hand tool the DuraLink to a metal smooth finish flush with the top of the ChernCurb. If the sloped roof is a Kynar coated roof, assemble and fill the entire ChernCurb with DuraLink. PART 6-10 YEAR LIMITED MATERIALS WARRANTY When applied in accordance with the CHEM LINK application insixuctions using only CHEM LINK materials, CHEM LINK, Inc. warrants its ChemCurb System against leaks for 10 years from the date of installation. Our liability under this warranty, and buyer's sole and exclusive remedy, will be to provide replacement product free of charge. CHEM LINK, Inc.'s totai liability far sale of this product shall in no event exceed the original cost of the product. CHEM LINK, Inc. shall not be liable for: cost of labor to apply the produet; damage to roofing, other struetures, or interior contents of buildings; or for any other damages, whether direct, incidental, or consequential. ROOF PENETRATION CURBS , �� I r u , � L_J L� ' ' � � I! _ I , 07200 — 4 of 5 � ' , � ' ' ' ' ' , � � � � � � � � � � ' APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed and implied, including the warranties of inerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and warranties in tort. CHEM LINK, Inc. also disclaims any liability �nder any non-warranty theory of liability, including, but not limited to contractual, tort, or liability. Neither the scope of the warranty nor liability thereunder may be extended except in writing executed by a duly elected o�cer of CHEM LINK, Inc. of Schoolcraft, Michigan. END OF SECTION 07200 ROOF PENETRATION CURBS 07200 — 5 of 5 , , APA 08.12 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION � PART1-GENERAL , 1.1 SUNIMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. r-, I� 1 ' ' ' ' ' �_ I , r ' ' ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS Pier 60 Storage Addition 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. B. Faced, R-30 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTIOI�1 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instxuctions applicable to products and applications indicated B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to rain at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thiclrnesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thiclaiess. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTI01�1 A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructians. B. R-26 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. END OF SECTION 07210 ' BUILDING INSULATION , 07210 - 1 of 1 , ' LJ ' � , , � , ' � ' ' ' ' ' ' APA 08.12 SECTION 07411— METAL ROOF PANELS PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed metal roofing panels with colored stone chip finish_ (Metro ROMAN Tile). 2. Battens used onty on Hip, Ridge and Rake areas. 3. Associated metal flashings. 4. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Sheathing" for custom-fabricated and on-site, roll-formed sheet metaI roofing. 1Z A. B. D. 1.3 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. REFERENCES ASTM A792/A792M - Sheet Steel, Aluminum - Zinc alloy coated by the Hot-Dip Process, structural (physical) quality. ASTM E 109 - Test for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Material. ULI897 Tests for wind uplift resistance of roof assemblies. ASTM C 920-86 - Specification for Electrometric Joint Sealant. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of inetal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, based on input from installers of the items involved. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of ineeting performance requirements. Product test reports. Field quality-control reports. Maintenance data. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site two weeks prior to commencing roofing. B. Perform work in accordance with guidelines as set out by Metro Roof Products installation instructions. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D_ Installer - Company specializing in performing the work of this Section shall be experienced in the installation of the roofing system or trained in its application by a manufacturer's representative. ' METAL ROOF PANELS ' 07411- 1 of 4 APA 08.12 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes. � Pier 60 Storage Addition , 1.6 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. During shipment, finished surfaces shall be protected &om abrasion. B. Accept metal roofing on site in packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Job site storage shall be in a clean, dry area out of direct contact with the ground, under cover or sloped for drainage, protected from tr�c, contamination by corrosion and staining materials. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide owner with a fifly (50) year written fully transferable, limited warranty for defects from Metro Roof Products as the roofing material manufacturer. B. A written guarantee on labor and workmanship will be supplied by the installer in connection with this contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. MANUFACTURERS: RoofingTile: Metro Roof Products 3093 'A' Industry Street . Oceanside CA 92054 Phone: (760) 435-9842 Fax: (760) 435-1162 E-Mail: info@metroroofproducts.com Internet: www.smartroofs.com or www.metroroofs.com Underlavment: Certainteed Corporation PANEL MATERIALS Metal Panels: Metro ROMAN Tile Pressure formed aluminum-zinc alloy coated sheet steel ASTM A792/A792M; 26 gauge thick stee152 1/4 inches long X 16 inches wide nominal size with five (5) individual concave tile under-pans and five (5) convex tile over-pans. Acrylic resin coated, colored stone chip finish. Architect shall select color from manufacturer's standard colors. Hips, Ridges and Rakes: Barrel Trim of sazne color and surface finish as Metro panels. Flashing - Stone-Coated: V-Bat'Bird-Stop' Profiled Riser Flashing, Fascia Flashing, Head- Wall Flashing, Z-Bar Flashing, Tile-Rake Metal Flashing, Valley Cover Flashing and Top- Course Flashing of same color and surface finish matching roof panels. Flashing - Painted: Provide as necessary for specific job various shaped metal flashing sections for transition areas with construction & Stone-Coated steel roof. Nails: Corrosion resistant full round headed flathead, Ring Shank nails, 8d, 2-3/&inch long X .131-inch diameter as approved by manufacturer with minimum 1,000 hows salt spray resistance to ASTM B 117. Screws: #-10 X 2" inch (Back heel of panel) &#-10 X 2-1l2" inch (Front downtum nose of panel) long corrosion resistant steel, moulded hex head screws or as approved by manufacturer. Color coat to match panel color. Minimum 1,000 hours salt spray resistance to A S'I'M B 117. Valley and other Flashings: Aluminum zinc a1Toy coated sheet ASTM-A792/A792M or G-90 Galvanized. NOTE: Copper and lead flashings shall not be used due to metal incompatibility. METAL ROOF PANELS � ' ' !�� I ' L_I � ' � ' ' �l ' �J , 07411 - 2 of 4 ' ' , , APA 08.12 � r ' , r,, i I� � ' � , ' , ' ' ' LJ � , Pier 60 Storage Addition 23 ACCESSORIES A. Battens: Nominal2-inch X 2-inch standard grade Douglas Fir (or equal) or bet�er along Hips, Ridges and Rakes. B. Batten Nails: Common smooth 16d, 3 1/2-inches long. C. Alternate Battens: Galvanized steel hat section; 25 gauge. D. Screws: Hot Dip galvanized steel; No. 10 by 2-inch long corrosion resistant steel screws or as approved by manufacturer. E. Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C 920-86. F. Pipe Iack Flashings: Metro SMART-Jack 3-in-1 (Fit pipes from 1-1/4" - 3") or 3-in-4 (Fit pipes from 3" - 4") rubber gasket pipe jacks stone coated to match the Metro panel finish. 26 gauge galvanized or aluminum/zinc alloy steel. Clean, prime and paint to match roof color. NOTE: Lead pipe flashing shall not be used. G. Pipe Sleeve Covers: Metro SMART-Sleeves (For pipes from 1/2" up to and including 4" diameter) and are designed to be used in conjunction with a Metro SMART-Jack pipe flashing. 2.4 IINDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Metalayment by Certainteed Corporation. B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Plywood: 5/8" thick. Refer to Division 5, "Sheathing." PART3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Insulation and Plywood Sheathing: Install substrate boards over metal roof deck on entire roof surface. Attach with fasteners as required by signed and sealed engineered drawings. B. Verity roof structure for correct framing prior to placing battens and Metro roof panels. C. Verify roof penetrations and plumbing vent stacks are in place and flash to roof surface. D. Exterior stucco accessible from roof is to be completed prior to roofing panel installation. E. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor that roof access by other trades be limited during installation. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. B. C. INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT: Install underlayment in strict accordance with Manufactwes recommendations and 2010 Florida Approval Number INSTALLATION - PERIMETER METALS Install Drip-Edge (or Metro FL-Fascia Stone-Coated) metal around roof perimeter, with end laps of a minimum of 4-inches, fastening per code. Install Metro Stone-Coated metal V-Bat Riser Metal on top of the drip edge metal making sure the Metro'Locator -Lip' detail is fitted together tightly. Fasten per code. Stagger end joints. Fasten in place with screws or nails as specified per manufacturer's instruction. 3.4 INSTALLATION - VALLEY A. Valleys shall be installed with minimum 6-inches overlap in the direction of flow_ B. Fasten in place minimum 24-inches centers through outer flange section of valley flashing or use hold tabs. Fasteners shall be either sealed or have a rubber-washered head to prevent leaking. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition C. Metro Roof Products roof panels shall be cut and accurately bent down into valley. Panels on opposing sides of valley shall form a straight and even line over the valley. 3.5 INSTALLATION - Metro ROMAN TILE A. Install Metro ROMAN Tile with alternating cowses staggered. B. Fastened at not less than eight (8) points (fow across the nose & four across the back flange} for regular conditions and twelve (12) points (six across the nose and six across the back flange) for High Velocity Hurricane Zones (HVHZ) areas. C_ Fastener points shall be, along the back flange and across the front downturn nose of each panel at the overlap, and at two other intermediate positions. D. Install tile to Meet 2010 Florida Approval number. 3.6 INSTALLATION - Metro Trim A. Place flashing and trim over locations as specified for their use by the manufacturer. B. Fold exposed ends of ridges and hips neatly and cap with similar roof material. C. Seal folds with sealant as required by manufactwer and secure with additional approved fasteners. END OF SECI'ION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 4 of 4 , � � , � ' r �� , , ' , ' � �� ' ' ' APA 08.12 SECTION 07520 — MODIFIED MEMBRANE ROOFING PARTl-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section IncIudes: 1. Rigid roof insulation. 2. Cover board. 3. Granular surfaced modified bituminous membrane roofing. 4. Base flashings. 5. Wallcway pads. 6. Roof drain. Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. ASTM International (A5TM): 1. C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 2. C728 - Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. 3. C1177lC1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 4_ C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 5. C1303 - Standard Test Method for Estimating the Long-Term Cbange in Thermal Resistance of Unfaced Rigid Closed Cell Plastic Foams by Slicing and Scaling Under Controlled Laboratory Conditions. 6. C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 7. D41 - Standard Specifcation for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and W aterproofing. 8. D312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 9. D1863 - Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up Roofs. 10. D2824 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings. 11. D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 12_ D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free_ 13. D4601 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. 14. D6162 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 15. D6163 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 16. D6164 - Standard Specification for 5tyrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements. 17. D6222 - Standard Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP} Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements. 18. D6223 - Standard Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 19. E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. ' MODIFIED MEMBRANE ROOFING ' 07520 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition ' 20. E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces. C. Factory Mutual Insurance Co. (FM): 1. 4470 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers. 2. Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 - Design Wind Loads. 3. Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 - Perimeter Flashing. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design roofing system to resist minimum wind loads in accordance with Building Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings - Indicate: a. Setting plan for insulation. b. Roof slopes. c. Base flashing, termination, and special details. d. Fastener types and locations. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's product specifications, installarion instructions, and general recommendations for each principal roofing product. 1.5 :. QU'ALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section. 2. Licensed or certified by roofing materials manufacturer. B. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene at site 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section. 2. Attendance: Architect, Contractor, Owner's Representative, roofing applicator, roofing manufacturer's representative, and related trades. 3. Review and discuss: Contract Documents, roofing system manufacturer's literature, project conditions, scheduling, and other matters affecting application. 4. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates; discuss substrate constntction, related work, work conditions, and materials compatibility. 1.6 A. B. C. D. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle rolled goods to prevent damage to ends. Protect materials against moisture absorption, direct sunlight, damage, and temperatures above 110 degrees F and below 40 degrees F. Store materials off ground or roof deck on pallets. Cover materials stored outside with breathable covering, properly vented. Stockpile gravel surfacing near building in clean, well drained area. Prevent inclusion of vegetation, building debris, and other deleterious materiat in surfacing. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply roofing to damp, wet, or frozen suUstrates, or during precipitation. 2. Do not apply emulsions when temperature is below 40 degrees F, or if freezing weather is anticipated within 24 hours after application. 3. Do not use frozen materials. MODIFIED MEMBRANE ROOFING � ' ��' r ' , ' � ' � � ' ' � �i ' 07520 - 2 of 4 , ' � 1 APA 08.12 ' 1.8 � I, � �I ' � C' � ' ' � ' ' � ' : C. � Pier 60 Storage Addition SEQUENCING Do not install more insulation than can be protected with roofing during the same day. Staging of roof inembrane application or temporary membrane is not acceptable; install system in final form each day. If phased roofing occurs as result of emergency condirions, instatl additional plies over phased areas. Install water stops at exposed edges of roofing system if work is stopped due to adverse weather conditions. Complete flashings daily. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer's 20 year warranty providing coverage against water leakage through roofing system. 1. Make repairs to roofing system required due to defects in materials or worlananship resulting in water leakage into or through roofing system. 2_ Include cost of labor and materials necessary to make required repairs. 3. Cover all roofing system components including roofing membrane, built-up and metal flashings, high wall waterproof flashings, roof insulation, [expansion joint covers,] and preflashed accessories. 4. Not limited to specific dollar amount. 5. Transferable to subsequent building owners during warranty period. 6_ Include coverage for wind speeds up to 120 MPH. PART 2 -ERODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Roofing System: 1. Certainteed (www.certainteed.com) 2. GAF Materials Corp. (www.gaf.com) 3. Johns Manville. (wwwjm.com) 4. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc. (www.tamko.com) B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Cover Board: 1. GP Gypsum Corporation. (www.gp.com) C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2Z MATERIAL5 A. Rigid Insulation: 1. Type: ASTM C 1289, Type II, rigid polyisocyanurate faced both sides with glass fiber mat facings. 2. Provide board tapered to 1/2 inch per foot. B. Cover Board: Densdeck roof board by Georgia Pacific, 48 inches wide by 1/2" thick. C. Roofing System: Certainteed SA-FR-C-B3 with 20-year warranty. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Edge Strips: Perlite, ASTM C728, 18 inches wide, tapered from 1 inch thick. B. Cant Strips: Perlite, ASTM C?28, 4 inch nominal vertical height, 45 degree face. C. Wallcway Pads: Adhesive set Certainteed grade GMS. D. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, approved by roofing system manufacturer, type and length suited to project conditions. E. Insulation Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, approved by FM and roofing system manufacturer, type and length suited to project conditions, with plastic plates. IMODIFIED MEMBRANE ROOFING ' 07520 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Storage Addition � F. Roof Drain: 4" Zum Z105 Control-Flo Roof Drain or approved equivalent. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete roof penetrations and preparation far drains, flashings, and other penetrations prior to beginning roofing. B. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces. 3.2 APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Apply roofing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NRCA Manual, and approved Shop Drawings. 33 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD A. Apply panels with long edges continuous [and perpendicular to [deck flutes.J [direction of insulation.] Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. [Offset joints from those in insulation.] [Locate ends over solid bearing.J B. Mechanically fasten to substrate in manufacturer's recommended fastening pattern. 3.4 APPLICATION OF ROOFING A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY PADS ` A. Clean substrate prior to placing; self-adhere to membrane. B_ Leave 6 inch space between pieces as detailed on drawing. - 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAIN A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 07520 MODIFIED MEMBRANE ROOFING ' ' � , ' � .� , ' � � , � � � 07520 - 4 of 4 ' ' ' , � � � � � � r � � � � ' APA 08.12 SECTION d7720 — ROOF HATCH AND FIXED LADDER PART1-GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. C. Pier 60 Storage Addition SUNIMARY Work included: Furnishing and installing factory fabricated roof hatch and fixed ladder. REFERENCES American Society for Testing and Materials (AST1V�, 100 Bar Harbor Drive, West Conshocken, PA 19428-2959; (610) 832-9585, fax (610) 832-9555 1. ASTM A 36-93a: Standard Specification for Structural Steel Miami-Dade Building Code Compliance Office, 140 W Flagler Street, Suite 1603, Miami, FL 33130-1563,phone(305)375-29Ul,fax(305)375-2908 1. N.O.A. 11-0722.10 High velocity hurricane zone, large and small missile impact. Florida Building Commission, 1940 North Monroe Street, Tallahassee FL 32399, phone: 850- 487-1824 l. 1. Florida Product Approval number FL13501 High velocity hurricane zone, large and small missile impact. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data for all materials in this specification. B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, accessories, location, and dimensions. C. Samples: Manufacturer to provide upon request; sized to represent material adequately. D. Contract Closeout: Roof hatch manufacturer shall provide the manufacturer's Wananty prior to : the coniract closeout if applicable. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Store materiaLs in a dry, protected, well-vented area. The contractor shall thoroughly inspect product upon receipt and report damaged m:aterial immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier's freight bill of lading. C. Remove protective wrapping immediately after installation if applicable. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Proposals for substitution products shall be accepted only from bidding contractors and not less than (10) working days before bid due date. Contractor guarantees that proposed substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof hatch. B_ Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width. C. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation instrucrions. D_ Coordinate installation with roof inembrane and roof insulation manufacturer's instructions before starting. E. Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work. 1.7 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE ' A_ Manufacturer's standard warranty: Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. Electrical � ROOF HATCH AND FIXED LADDER 07720 - 1 of 3 � APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition ' motors, special finishes, and other special equipment (if applicable) shall be warranted separately by the manufacturers of those products. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Roof Hatch: The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, l-203-934-6363, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www_bilco.com l . No substitutions. B. Fixed Ladder: 1. Cotterman Co. 1-800-552-3337 2. FS Indnstries 1-800-421-0314 3. Cacico Ladders ]-800-403-7024 4. Substitutions are allowed. 2.2 � : � � E. F G H. ROOF HATCH Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof hatch Type S, size width: 3'0" (914mm) x length: 2'6" (762mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or a maximum design pressure of+ or - 7d psf (342kg/m2) with a factor of safety of 2. . 2. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. 3_ Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 4. Entire hatch shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. Cover: Shall be 11 gauge aluminum with a 3" (76mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1" (25.4mm) thicla�ess, fully covered and protected by a metal liner 18 gauge aluminum. Curb: Shall be 12" (305mm) in height and of 11 gauge aluminum. The curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2" (89mm) flange with 7/16" (I l.lmm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6" (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1" (25.4mm) thiclaiess on outside of curb. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe [for aluminum construction: welded to the curb assembly; for steel construction: through bolted to the curb assembly]. Hardware 1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. 4. The latch strilce shall he a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly. ROOF HATCH AND FIXED LADDER � � � � � � �� , � � � 07720 - 2 of 3 � � ' ' APA 08.12 � � � � � i__I I. J. Pier 60 Storage Addition 5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1" (25.4mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing. 6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware. 7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. Model 5-50 (aluminum cover and curb) shall be Miami-Dade Product Control approved, NOA #10-0113.01 (Exp. 12/2/14) meeting large and small missile impact requirements. 2.3 FIXED LADDER A. Ladder: 1. Side Rails: Continuous steel flat bars, I/2 x 2-1/2 inches, eased edges, spaced 22 inches apart. 2. Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameters, spaced 12 inches on center. Fit rungs in centerlines of side rails and plug weld on outer rail face. 3. Support ladders at top, bottom, and at intermediate points spaced maximum 5'-0" on center with steel brackets, welded or bolted to supports. 4. Ladder shall be galvanized. � PART 3 -EXECUTION � 3.1 INSPECTION : A. Verify that roof hatch installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation. � � � � i � 1 � 3.2 A. B_ C. INSTALLATION Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier before fabrication. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer's roof hatch details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the roof hatch Manufacturer's installation instructions. The installer shall furnish mechanical fasteners consistent with the roof requirements. ' END OF SECTION 07720 ROOF HATCH AND FIXED LADDER 07720 - 3 of 3 � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 07730 — ROOF HATCH GRIP PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specialty custom designed HATCHGRIP� (Patent Numbers 6,095,283; 6,347,685; 6,619,428) for roof hatches, including, � 1. HATCHGRIP� - Model Number HTG-PCG � � � � � � � � r � 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07720 — Roof Hatches 1.3 REFERENCES A. AISC M016 Manual of Steel Constraction, Allowed Stress Design B. ASTM A 36/A 36M Standard Specification for Structural Steel C. ASTM A 123 (Standard Specification fro Zinc coating — Hot Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel Products) D. ASTM Z325 (Bolts, Nuts, and Washers) E. Joint Surface Preparation, SSPC-3, Power Tool Cleaning F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM} - ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel G. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISn - AISI CL 304. H. American Welding Society Shuctural Welding Code (AWS) - AWS D1.1, D1.2 1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The HATCHGRIP� provides horizontal grab bars to assist in safely exiting/entering a roof hatch. 1.5 SUBNIITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing layout, profiies, and product components, including anchorage, hardware, and finishes. Include dimensional plans, applicable material specifications, elevations and sections detailing mounting and connections. D. Closeout Submittals: Provide Operation and Maintenance data to include methods for maintaining installed products, precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Experience: Manufacturer must demonstrate a minimum of Five (5) years successfu2 experience in design and manufacture of similar related products. B. Provide evidence to the effect, including list of installations, descriptions, name and method of contact shall be provided. C. Welder Qualifications: Welders Certified in accordance with American Welding Society Procedures: AWS-I-GMAW-S, WPS No. B2.004.90 for applicable material used in produetion of specified product � ROOF HATCH GRIP � 07730 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1.7 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials in manufacteu'er's original, unopened, undamaged shipping container with identification labels intact. B. Storage 1. Store all materials in a dry, controlled area to protect from elements and damage. If outdoor storage is required, block materials to store at an incline, to prevent pooling of any moisture and promote runoff. 2. Do not tarp tightly, as this will entrap moisture. Instead, tarp materials in a tent-like arrangement, elevated above the product with open sides to allow airflow. 3. For additional questions on delivery, storage, or bandling, contact the manufacturer at 800.284.0623 or 701.746.4519 or email to 4psinfo@psdoors.com. C. Handling 1. Use caution when unloading and handling product to avoid bending, denting, crushing, or other damage to the product. 2. When using forklifts, use forks of proper length to fully support product being moved. Consult shop drawings or consult witb factory for proper lift points. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties 1. Manufacturer provides limited warranty on this product and components to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of One (1) year from date of shipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Phone Toll Free: 800-284-0623. Phone: 701-746-4519. Fax: 701-775-7415. Web Site: www.psdoors.com. E-mail: 4psinfo@psdoors.com. B. Substitutions: Permitted. C. Obtain all HATCHGRIP� assemblies from single manufacturer. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Products Details: 1. HATCHGRIP� provides horizontal grab bars to assist in safely exiting/entering a roof hatcb by providing horizontal hand holds to ascend or descend through the hatch opening. 2. Only horizontal grip members are reliable to sustain a fall of the body if the foot slides off the rung for any reason. If a vertical member is held, no matter what the shape of the side rail or the strength of grip, the force of falling causes the hand to slide, producing an impact with the next rail obstruction, which causes release of the handhold and a resulting fall. 3. ModellOperation Options: 4. Model: HTG-PCG - HATCHGRIP� 5. Material requirements: See Section 2.3 MATERIALS. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Attributes 1. HATCHGRIP� to be fabricated from structural or formed steel shapes, ASTM A36; tubing, ASTM-A-500 Grade B, ASTM-A-513; bars, ASTM-A-36, M1020; of appropriate size and strength, welded construction. Optional materials include Stainless Steel (304 ar 316). ROOF HATCH GRIP �� . � � L_.J � 07730 - 2 of 3 � � � �_1 � � � J � � � ' � C� l__ � � APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 2. Finish on all exposed surfaces to be Powder Coat Gray. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fit and sbop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Supply components required for ancborage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otberwise. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Compliance: Comply with all manufacturer's product data, including installations instructions, reference drawings, shipping, handling, and storage instructions, and product carton instructions for installation_ 3.2 PREPA.ItATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION/APPLICATTON A. HATCHGRIP� Installation l. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, shop drawings, and details. 2. All bolted connections must be tight with no fewer than two threads exposed and the nuts are to be positively locked by provide lock nuts. B. Tolerances 1. All dimensional requirements must be in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and shop drawings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation: Product to be installed using good general construction methods and practices, in accordance with manufachuer's instructions and drawings. B. Field Tests/Installation Verification: 1. Verify all anchorage is in accordance with manufacture's installation instructions and applicable data sheets. 3.5 CLEANING A. Repair or replace damaged installed products or components. B. Touch up damaged finish. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during handling, storage, and installation. B. Protect installed product and finish surfaces during normal and general use. END OF SECTION 07730 � ROOF HATCH GRIl' � 07730 - 3 of 3 LJ � � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS Pier 60 Storage Addition PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SIJNIlI2ARY A. This Secrion includes }oint sealants for the foliowing applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal noniraffic surfaces. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. � 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS . A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be � incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. � � � � �� 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materiaLs that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. 5ealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classificarions for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B_ Stain-Test Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous subs�ates, provide products that have undergone testing according to A5T'M C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for t}�e length of exposure indicated by reference � JOINT SEALANTS � 07920 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCSI700. c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Availabte Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1 a. b. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. d. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T(traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 2.4 A. B. C. D. JOINT-5EALANT BACHING General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. C�lindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C(closed-cell material with a surface skin), O(open-cell material), B(bicellular material with a surface skin), or any ofthe preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: Elastomeric Tubing Sealaut Backings: Neoprexie, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible j oint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint wbere such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOU5 MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 of 4 � � � � � � � � � � � � � APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to � promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. L� � � � . � f_� � � � PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere witb adhesion of joint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply � primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's wrilten instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adj oining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 A. B. C. � E. INSTALLATION Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applicarions, and conditions indicated. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Install sealant bacicings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joini configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to j oint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1 JOINT SEALANTS � 07920 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 F G H I. LJ Pier 60 Storage Addition � Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, tums, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior and exterior perimeter joints between frames of doors. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component'nonsag urethane sealant. .,. 2. Joint-Sealant Coior: Color as selected by Architect. B. 3oint-Sealant Application: Interiar and exterior joints to masonry and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 1. 3oint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2_ Joint-Sealant Color: Match color of plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS � � � �� I� � � 07920 - 4 of 4 � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PARTl- GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following. � 1. Steel Doors 2. Steel Door Frames 3. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors � 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of door assemblies required to comply with the Florida Building code Approval System. � � � � � �' � � � � 1.3 REFERENCES A. Steei Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) 1.4 SUBNIITTAL - ; A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with alI other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100. B. Finish hardware supplier is to fumish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) compiete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and feld use. D. Include details on the following list of items: 1. Frame elevations 2. Door design elevations 3. Frame sections 4. Details of construction 5. Anchorage 6. Opening conditions 7. Joints and connections 8. Hardware locations E. Upon request of the architect or for any substiturion to this specification, (4) copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any material is placed on the job site. 2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steet Doors and Frames ANSUSDI 100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1 of 5 APA 08.I2 � Pier 60 Storage Addition � 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule. B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frarnes upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANLIFACTURER A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company — Series H with GrainTech finish. B. Door assemblies shall resist the cyclic pressures, static pressures, and missile impact loads as detailed in Florida Building Code Test Protocols TAS 201, TAS 202, and TAS 203. 2.2 HARDWA.RE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. . Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. C: Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others. 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Material - Doors and as indicted on the schedules and in this section. 1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III - 14ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than l4 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. 5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 6. Doors shall be laminated full-flush design with GrainTech; color will be selected from six standard finishes. 7. Door core for insulated door shall be rigid polystyrene insulation. �_� � � � � � � � � � � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 2 of 5 � � i � APA 08.12 � � � � �� ' � � � 2.4 A : C. � Pier 60 Storage Addition STEEL FRAMES Materials — Door sas indicted on the schedules and in this section. 1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60, 16ga. 2. A11 frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule. 1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series Fabrication 1. General design and construction a. Provide steel frames for doors to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings. b. All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. c. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. d. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be. fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others. e. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100_ f. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling, and tapping shall be done by others. g. Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel. Anchors l. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type. 3. Dust boxeslmortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. 4. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening. 5. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 6. Provide 3 silencers on single door. 2.5 DOOR LOUVERS A. Materials 1. Material to be #316 stainless steel. 2. The blades of the louver are welded to a fabricated sub-frame. 3. Louver is held in place by auxiliary frame, 16 gauge anchored with stainless steel phillips screws from inside requiring no drilling through door. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES �� 08100 - 3 of 5 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition Anemostat Door Products PLSL Louver with security grille non-vision inverted split Y. 2.6 LABELED DOORS, FRAMES, AND LOUVERS A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as scheduled. B. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings are to bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory 2.7 A. 2.8 A. B. C. PRIME FINISH: Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A254.10 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted ALTERNATE 2 DOOR AND FRAME REPLACEMENT: Replace doors and frames as noted as 6, 7 an 8 shown on Exterior Elevation Sheet A-3.3. Hardware shall be new and match existing. Verify size of opening before ordering doors and frames. Part 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION � A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate. B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar. 4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material. 5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-I 10. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES � � � � � � �� tJ � � 081 QO - 4 of 5 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � APA 08.12 �� 3.3 A. B. 3.4 A. Pier 60 Storage Addition 4. "Installation Guide for poors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. ADJUST AND CLEAN Check and re-adjust operaring finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer. SCHEDULES After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the owner when the building is accepted. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 5 of 5 LJ � � � � � �� J � City of Clearwater 08.12 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 PART I - GENER4� Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. 1 A2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Steel Doors and Frames 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK � A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, � as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware sha11 meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having � jurisdiction over this project, notwithsta.nding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. � D. FASTENERS: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally � prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. � Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished � to match adjacent hardware. 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). � �� E. HURRICANE OPENINGS: 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 of 7 City of Clearwater 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by tocal authority for the types and sizes of doors required, and compties with the requirements of the door and door frame. 1.04 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an A.HC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general : C. contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. The finish hardware supplier shail prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and .written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-insta.11ation class as well as a post-installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper instailation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after insta.11ation or Ionger as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. B. Overhead door clvsers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective maxerials and worlmianship for a period of ten (10) years FINISH HARDWARE ag�io - z of � , � � � � � � � � � lJ �_J �� [J � ' �� City of Clearwater 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of � failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. � � � PART II - PRODUCTS 2A1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT ACCEPTA,BLE MANLTFACTURER � 1) Hinges Hager 2) Locks & Latches Best � 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best � 4) Exit Devices Von Duprin 5) Door Closers LCN � 6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson 7) Push Button Access Best 8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics � 9) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Stops, Flushbolts 10) Kick Plates Ives � 11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard 12) Silencers Ives 13) Key Cabinet Lund � � � � � � ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE Stanley, Bommer Schlage ' None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) Rixson None (No Substitution) Sentronics Rockwood, Trimco Rockwood, Qnality Pemko, Zero Rockwood, Trimco Key Control C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Sta.inless Steel (32D). Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. FINISH HARDWARF 08710 - 3 of 7 City of Clearwater 08.12 2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS: i Pier 60 Storage Addition � A. Exterior butts shall be Sta.inless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt � for each 2'6" in height or fra.ction thereof. 2.04 KEYING: A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system. B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. (Permanent cores need to be ordered at least 5 weeks prior to turning over to the City of Clearwater.) C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six. Owner to provide additional keys needed. D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The city will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property of the city upon completion of the work. 2.05 LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "35H" series, 15H Design as manufaciured by BEST on New Construction "93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled. 2.06 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Fumish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSUBHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certiiied testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors FINISH HARDWARE � 08710-4of7 , � ' � � � � , � � � i � � � � � � � City of Clearwater 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL IOC. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop Iocation to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PR� are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 2.07 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 8" high All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push piates, pull plates, door pnlls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown ir� the hardware schedule. 2.08 DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS43b or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.09 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.10 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish (3) rubber door silencers equaI to Ives SR64 for hollow metal frames. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5 of 7 City of Clearwater 08.12 PART III - EXECUTION Pier 60 Storage Addition 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and insta.11ed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after insta.11ation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre-installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A... Contractor shall adjust all hardware. in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any iinal adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. DOOR HARDWARE SET: Door #1 to have: 3— Hinges BB 1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D 1— Lock ND80PD RHO US26D 1— OH Stop GJ904F US32D 2— Kick Plate 40" x 18" LDW US32D 1 — 'Threshold 20QSAV 1 — Weatherstrip 303AV Hagar Best LCN Rockwood Pemko Pemko FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 6 of 7 � � , � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � City of Clearwater 08.12 Door #2 to have: 3— Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 2— Lock ND70PD RHO US26D 1— Closer 4011 TB AL (DR. 14) 1- Kick Plate 30" x 18" LDW US32D 1 — Stop 409 US32D 3 — Silencers 33 l — Threshold 2005AV 1— Weatherstrip 303AV END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE Pier 60 Storage Addition �� Best LCN Rockwood LCN LCN Pemko Pemko 08710 - 7 of 7 � � APA 08.12 , � � SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 SITNIlVIA.RY A. This Section includes the following: l. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath solid-plaster bases. B. See Division 5 Section "Co1d-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � � 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before stuccoing, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft_ (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. � 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F(4.4 deg C). � PART2-PRODUCTS � 21 MANiTFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: � 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. � � � r � 2.2 LATH A. PermaLath 1000 by BASF: Fiber reinforcing latl� with open weave, three-dimensional, self- furring, nominal 1/4" thick glass fiber reinforcing. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thiclaiesses and number of plaster coats required B. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Bull-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of ' control joint. IPORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ' 09220 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Allcaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland eement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II]. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 2.6 A. B. C. PLASTER MIXES General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients bave mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed I lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: 1. Over Concrete Unit Masonry; Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix I part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate votumes of each component material). Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to A5TM C 926. 3.2 INSTALLING LATH A. Install PermaLath 1000 manufactured by BASF in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Apply Permalath 1000 over substrate with minimum 3" overlap at vertical and horizontal edges and overlap on flange of trim accessories. Permalath 1000 can be applied horizontally or vertically and should be applied such that it is flat and free of ripples, wrinkles, etc. 2. Fasteners: ULP-302 (1-3/4") or Lath Plate (1-1/4") Mechanical Fastening Systems by Wind-Lock Corp. a. Masonry: Masonry type [M] expansion fastener with ULP 302 diameter washer; or Lath Plate 25mrn (1") penetration into masonry. Fastener spacing 6" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c. horizontally. b. Light Gauge Steel Framing/Furring (20 Gauge): Light metal type [LM] bugle head screws with ULP 302 (1-3/4") diameter washer or Lath Plate 16 mm (5/8") minimum penetration into framing 6" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c. horizontally. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER � L� � � �� lJ � � � � � 09220 - 2 of 3 � � ' � APA 08.12 � � � ' � � � � � � � � � � � c. d. e. Pier 60 Storage Addition Heavy Gauge Steel Framing ( I 8 to 12 Gauge maximum): Metal Type [S] bugle head screws with ULP 302 (1-3/4") diameter washer or Lath Plate or 32 mm (1- 1/4") long x 2.5 mm (1/8") diameter VersaPin Gripshank fasteners by Aerosmith Fastening Systems with Lath Plates; 16 mm (5/8") minimum penetration to framing 6" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c. horizontally. Wood Framing: Wood type [W] bugle head screws with ULP 302 (1-3/4" diameter washer or Lath Plate; 16 mm (5/8") minimum penetration into framing or minimum 16 gauge wire staples with minimum 3/4" crown and minimum 3/4" penetration into framing, 6" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c_ horizontally. Note: Supplemental fasteners, into the framing or the sheathing, can be used to secure the PermaLath 1000 prior to application of cement plaster stucco. Fastening systems/tools for staples are available through Senco and other manufacturers. 3.3 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install comerbead at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply witli ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float sand finish to match Architect's sample. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed END OF SECTION 09220 � PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ' 09220 - 3 of 3 ' � , , i � � � r� r) �_� i � , � � � � � APA 0812 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL Pier 60 Storage Addition 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division i Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lu_�u_o_ � A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except wbere the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adj acent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Ownerwill select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels_ 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components• 3. 4. a. Toilet partitions. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment c. Lightfixtures. d. Distribution cabinets. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM}, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Far each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 2_ Material List Provide an inclusive list of required coating materiaLs. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. � PAINTING �J 09900 - 1 of 7 APA 08.12 i: ' Pier 60 Storage Addition � 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated 1. After color selection, the Owner will fumish coior chips for surfaces to be coated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from fr.eezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and healih hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and sunounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(?2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1_ Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Funnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels descnbing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Fumish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or l case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Names: following: PAINTING Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the r , i �� i � � � � � � 09900 - 2 of 7 � ' ' � APA 08.I2 �1 � ;_� ' � � �J � � � , , � � � � Pier 60 Storage Addition Porter Paint Company (Paint Schedule is based on Porter Paint. If another manufacturer is submitted, submit both Porter Data Sheets along with Data Sheets for paint proposed to be used. All products must be equivalent or exceed quality of Porter Products scheduled for Architect's approval.) ICI Dulux Paints. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXA.MINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painring will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been conected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Appiicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, fiunish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified_ 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementirious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted Remove efflorescence, challc, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation_ a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufaciurer. Power spray exterior of existing building to be repainted b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and � PAINTING � 09900 - 3 of 7 APA 08.12 I] ' Pier 60 Storage Addition � burn, correct this condirion before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off: a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat ofwhite shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the scbedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint fitrn. 3_ Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protecrion. 5_ Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture the same as similar exposed surfaces_ Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. PAINTING � � � LJ , � �J � , �� 09900 - 4 of 7 � , ' � APA 08.12 i B. ' i � ' � C. , � . D. , E. � ' � � � � F. G. H. I. 7. Pier 60 Starage Addition Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry fiim thickness equivalent to tbat of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to pemut proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface.or item being.painted.. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by ... the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of inechanical and electxical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Ductwork. 3. Insulation. 4. Accessory items. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finisbed and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, i P��,� � 09900 - 5 of 7 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Storage Addition holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperFections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacit}�. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k_ Skinning. l. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not connply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rej ected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coarings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Conect damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after complering painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. , � ' � , � � � � PAINTING 09900 - 6 of 7 � , ' � APA 08.12 Pier 60 5torage Addition 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A_ Sand Float Stucco and repainting of existing building: 1. First Coat: "PorterLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic B. Hardie Fiber Cement Trim and Soffits: 1. First Coat: #51 S Series Primer 2. Intermediate Coat; "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic C. P.T. Wood: Painted: 1. First Coat: #515 Series Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 PortersepY' Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic D. Doors and Frames: 1. First Coat: "Porter Guard" #215/212 series, DTM Primer 2. Intercnediate Coat: "Porter Guard" #2905 series, DTM Gloss Enamel 3. Top Coat: "Porter Guard" #2905 series, DTM Gloss Enamel 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Interior Masonry Walls: 1. First Coat: Porter #896 Block Filler 2. Second Coat: Porter #896 Block Filler 3. Third Coat: Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy 4. Top Coat: Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy B. Interior Ceilings: C. First Coat: #515 Series Primer 1. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 2. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic D. Concrete Floor Sealer : , 1. First Coat: Canto1227 Water-based Seal & Finish for Concrete 2, Top Coat: Canto1227 Water-based Seal & Finish for Concrete END OF SECTION 09900 � , � � ' PAINTING , 09900 - 7 of 7 APA 08.12 SECTION 10520 — FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Pier 60 Storage Addition PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUD'IlVIARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Wall brackets. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 154 - Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers. 2. 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. 3. 626 - 2-1/2 Gallon Stored Pressure, Water Type Fire Extinguishers. 4. 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers. 5. 1093 - Halogenated Agent Fire Extinguishers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submitials for Review: 1. Product Data: Include data on extinguishers and brackets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Provide fire extinguishers complying with UL 711 and NFPA 10. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Incorporated_ (www.ansul.com) 2. JL Industries. (www jlindustries.com) 3. Larsen's Mfg_ Co. (www.larsensmfg.com) 2Z COMPONENTS A. Extinguishers: 1. Multi-purpose dry chemical type, UL 299, stainless steel, cast steel tank, Class 4A:80B:C, 10 pound nominal capacity. B. Brackets: Formed galvanized steel, sized to accommodate extinguisher. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Type best suited to application. 2.4 FINISHES A. Brackets: Baked enamel, red color B. Extinguishers: Baked enamel, red color. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Instail brackets in accordance with manufacturer's inshuctions. B. Set plumb, level, and rigid. C. Place an extinguisher on each bracket. END OF SECTTON 01502 Pier 60 Storage Addition FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 of 2 � � � � ' , 1 1 ' i ' ' , � � � � ' ' APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Pier 60 Concession Retail Mechanical Renovations Pier 60 Clearwater Beach, Florida ARCHITECT: Plisko Architecture, PA, AIA 800 Drew Street Clearwater, FL 33755 727-442-7200 MECHANICAL ENGINEER: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727)822-2335 Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727) 822-2335 Address all communications regarding this work to the Architect at the address listed above. ' � APA 08_12 � ' Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Pier 60 Concession Retaii Mechanical Renovations Pier 60 Clearwater Beach, Florida SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ' TABLE OF CONTENTS August 17, 2012 , ' ' • Table of Contents • Schedule of Drawings Section Section Page Number Title Number DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 ................ Summary .......................................................................................................01100 — l of 2 ' 01322 ................ Photographic Documentation.......................................................................01322 — 1 of 2 01330-•-•-------..... Submittal Procedures ..........................................................................:...:.....01330 — l of 6 01420 ................ References.--------............----................................---•-�----.....--------�--�---�--------.....01420 —1 of 1 ' 01500 ................ Temporary Facilities and Controls................................................._.....:._:....01500 — 1 of 3 01524 ................ Construction Waste Management........................._..._...__...._.._...__.........._.....01524 — l of 1 01600 ................ Product Requirements ...................-----•-•--.....................................................01600 — 1 of 4 ' O1'731 ................ Cutting and Patching ....................................................................................01731 — 1 of 3 01732 ................ Selective Demolition ................................................---.................................01732 — 1 of 3 01770 ................ Closeout Procedures.....................................................................................01770— 1 of 4 01781 ................ Project Record Documents...........................................................................01781— 1 of 2 r � � ' ' � DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION (notused) DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE (not used) DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 04200 ................ Unit Masonry................................................................................................04200 — 1 of . 5 DIVISION 5 — METALS (not used) DIVISION 6— WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ................ Rough Carpentry............................................................_.._....-•---....----------....06100 —1 of 2 � TOC , 1 of 2 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07100 ................ Roof Equipment Stands..............................................................---•--.._.....---.07100 — 1 of 1 07200....----•----... Roof Penetration Curbs .................................................................•-•----........072d0 — 1 of 5 07210-• .............. Building Insulation ....._.................-----...........................................................0721 d-1 of 1 07920 ................ Joint Sealants ...................._........_..................................................................07920 —1 of 4 DIVISION 8— DOORS AND WINDOWS (not used) DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09220 ................ Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) ................................................................09220 —1 of 3 09512 ................ Acoustical Panel Ceiling..............................................................................09512 — 1 of 3 09900 ................ Painting .........................................................................................................09900 — i of 5 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES (not used) DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT (not used) DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS (not used) DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (not used) DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS (not used) DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL Refer to Sheet M-5 for Mechanical Specifications DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL Refer to Sheet E-6 for Electrical Specifications End of Table of Contents TOC 2of2 , ' ' ' ' , ' ' � , ' � , ' � ' ' , � ' ' APA 08.12 Schedule of Drawings ►��.i-i ��r�;��r A-1 FLOOR PLAN, PROPOSED ROOF PLA.N & RCP A-2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS MECHANICAL M 1 MECHANICAL C4VER PAGE M 2 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN M 3 MECHANICAL FLOOR & ROOF PLAN M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS & SCHEDULES M 5 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL E1 E2 E3 E4 ES E6 Pier 60 Retail Mech Renovations ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL RENOVATIONS PLANS ELECTRICAL DETAILS ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 of 1 , ' � ' ' l__l. APA 08.12 SECTION 0110(1— SUMMARY PART1-GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. Section Includes: , 1.2 ' ' � ' � , �l ' ' � :_ Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1. Work covered by Contract Documents. 2. Access to site. 3. Coordination with occupants. 4. Work restrictions_ 5. Specification and drawing conventions. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Pier 60 Concession Retail Mechanical Renovations. :. C 1. Project Location: Pier 60 Clearwater Beach, Florida. Owner: City of Clearwater. 1. Owner's Representative: Leroy Chin. Architect: PGsko Architecture, P.A. 800 Drew Street Clearwater, FL 33755 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and Bidder's Proposal Form. B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operarions to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day- to-day operarions. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.5 SPECIRICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1_ Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated othervvise. � SUMMARY �' 01100 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifcations. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specif cations. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1_ Terminology: Materials and products are identifed by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specifcation Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY O 1100 - 2 of 2 1 , � � � ' , ' 11 � ' � � � ' � ' ' APA 08.12 SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconslxuction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Cl�eout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL 5UBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project_ b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs tbat identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2, Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field off ce at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. � PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ' �1322 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 02322 - 2 of 2 ' ' APA 08.12 � � � ' � � � '� ' ' � � SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes adminis�ative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: . Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related acrivities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transrnittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. C. Identi�cation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I' � 01330 - 1 of 6 APA 08.12 � E_ F. G � I. ' Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations ' h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.O1.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be retiuned. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Resubmittals: Ma1ce resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. . 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "REVIEWED." � Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to�manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" taken by Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � I� � � ' � � � ' � � � � 01330-2of6 � �> � , APA 08.12 ' � � � u ' � � � � � � � �.I C. � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 4. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will retum five copies. Mark up and retain one retumed copy as a Project Record Document Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fulty illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Scbedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, pattems, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least.8-_ll2by.11 inches: but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3_ Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will retum one copy. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. l. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Nurnber and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing � SUBNIITTAL PROCEDURES � 01330-3 of6 APA 08.12 E. F G 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. I. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. l. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signahue of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation_" Qualification Data: Prepare written information tbat demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's leiterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterbead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES , � � ' � � � � 01330 - 4 of 6 � � LJ � APA 08.12 � � � � �� K. L. M. N � � P. � .. Q. � R. � S. � � T. � U. � � V. Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating cunent product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable.codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary .of loads. Include load diagams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendarions, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspecrions. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amouuts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN � A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � 01330 - 5 of 6 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect_ B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for eact� product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Docurnents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A: General: Architect will not review. submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. . B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Reviewed. C` � E. 2. Revise. 3. Rejected. 4. Furnish as Corrected_ Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. Submittals not required by the Coniract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES , � , � � i � � � � � � �, 01330-6of6 � u � � � r L_ � �� APA 08.12 SECTION 01420 — REFERENCES PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations l.l DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of tbe Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized;' "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms inclnding "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use_ ' I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Proj.ect site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are nsed in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 � REFERENCES � 01420 - 1 of 1 � � APA 08.12 � � � � � � � � � � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERA.L 11 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 1Z USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in tbe Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for conshuction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or autborities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having � jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program - 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use_ Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART Z -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD comer and pull posts, with I-5/8-inch OD tc� rails. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. � TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS � 01500 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � PART3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate faciliries where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E.. F. 3.3 A. � � E. TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for tinne when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for constntction. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing Service. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for conshuction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION General: Cotnply with the following: i_ Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free ofwater. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identifcation signs as indicated in Project Manual. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS � � f�� l � � � � � � O l 500 - 2 of 3 !� � � � APA 08_12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations P. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle � waste from construction operarions. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." � 3.4 � � CI _J � � � � � � � � A. : � E. F.: G � SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utiiities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered Repair damage to existing facilities. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply witb authorities having jurisdiction. Stortnwater Control: Comply witb requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by nwoff of stormwater from heavy rains. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and instalt site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easiiy entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by Iimiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary.enclosure around partially. completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPOR.ARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 of 3 � � APA 08.12 � � � Pier 6d Retail Mechanical Renovations SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART1-GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. T}us Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. � 1.2 � � � � � � � A. B. C. D. DEFINITIONS Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from constnzction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or conshuction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) - PART3-EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A_ General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent sudaces and areas. B. Buming: Do not bum waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 � CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT �� 01524 - 1 of 1 �1�I !_.J � � � � � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of tlze Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, iunction, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. l. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS � 01600 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 /:7 � C. PRODUCT WARRANTIES Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty fumished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specifc rights for Owner. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that coutains appropriate terms and identifcation, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specifc information and properly executed 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated fortn properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART2-PRODUCTS Z.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contraci Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS � � � � � � � 01600 - 2 of 4 � � i � APA 08.12 � � � � � � � � � � C_ Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standaxd Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranries not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by tbe term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifcations name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. � b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Wkere Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product_ 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. � PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS � O I 600 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 Pier 60 RetaiI Mechanical Renovations 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may retuin requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of signif cant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 � � � � � � � � PRODUCT REQLTIREMENTS 01600 - 4 of 4 � � � � i 1 � �I � � � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Tbis Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 2.2 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patcbing Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include tl�e following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and MechanicaUElectrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.3 A. B. C. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capaciTy or load-deflection ratia Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased rnaintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Visual Requirexnents: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory rnanner. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 PART2-PRODUCTS �I LJ Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible_ 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditians for portions of Project that might be � exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and MechanicaUElectrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 33 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Ctit in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: C�t or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diarnond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. CUTTING AND PATCHING , � � � � � 01731 - 2 of 3 � � � � APA 08.12 � � � �� l_J � � � � C. � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutring are complete. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materiaLs and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. . END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING OI731-3of3 LJ � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. � B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. � 1.2 � � � � � � � � A. � � DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from exisring construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining constxuction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding witb selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. l. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Exisring Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) � SELECTNE DEMOLITION � 01732 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.2 A. B. � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � EXAMINATION Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing condirions by use of preconstruction photographs. l. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentarion." Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services. and mechanicaUelectrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain conrinuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, wallcs, wallcways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the e�ctent required by new construction and as indicated Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. SELECTNE DEMOLITION � � L_ � � IJ J � � � � 01732-2of3 � � � � APA 08.12 � � �� l r � � � � � �1 � C. 3.5 A_ B. C. Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of bidden space before starting flame-cutting operations_ Maintain fire watch and portable fire- suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Pr�ject site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste - Management." Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Retum adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732 � SELECTNE DEMOLITION � 01732 - 3 of 3 � � � � � , i APA 08.12 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. � 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. � � � � � � � � 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Scbedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUB5TANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of seven days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permiriing Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or setttement surveys, property surveys, and similar fnal record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through I6 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through i 6 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architec� Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 C. � � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. l. Make final changeover of perrnanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 2. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tooLs, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspecrion or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued_ 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspecrion when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected_ 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIS� A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4 � � � � � � �� APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and � proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. � 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated Architect will return two copies. � 1.8 � � �J � � � � � � � �J n I�. :� SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties .and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigaiion to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Crreen Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, anii grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 3.2 A, B. Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Ralce grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. e. f. g- h. k. l. m. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. REPAIR OF THE WORK Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating condirions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES � L� � � � � � r � � � � � � 01770 - 4 of 4 � � , � , � � � � � � !_� � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PARTI-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SUNIMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set of plots. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three sets of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. _ B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract rnodifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to infortnation on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic infortnation in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. � PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS � 01781 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment fumisbed, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufactur , supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as one paper copy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record docnments in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss_ Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS � � � L_.l � � i � � �J � � � � 01781-2of2 � � � � �� APA 08.12 PART 1 1.01 A. 1.02 A. l .03 A. � l .04 A. � B. � � � � �� C. PART 2 2.01 A. 2.02 A. B. C. D. Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section. SCOPE OF WORK Provide labor, material, equipment and perform operations necessary for, and incidental to, erection of masonry work. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f m): 1. fm = 1500 psi on net area. QUALITY ASSURANCE Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1/ASCE.6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures". Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per ASTM E l 19 by a testing and inspecring organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. GEI�TEItAL MATERIALS - GENERAL Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Secrion applicable to each material indicated. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry required. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. Provide Type II, non-moisiure controlled units. � UNIT MASONRY �� 04200-I of 5 APA 08.12 E F G. 2.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.04 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Use inspection and cleanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout pour heights in ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.SC with Table 7. See Florida Building Code page 35.1 Weight classification: Normal weight MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Mortar - Type M or S Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color. Ready-mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Aggregate for mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404. Water: Clean and potable. REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than I O feet, with prefabricated comer an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: l. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). C. For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. i]NIT MASONRY 04200-2 of 5 � � t � � � � � � � � � � � � � , � L _I APA 08.12 2.05 MASONRY CLEANERS Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations A. Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (�/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. B. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water, mixed in a non-metallic container with acid added to water. C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a' concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents. E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. F. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be used to clean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. •"Sure. Klean No. 600 Detergent", ProSoCo, Inc. 2. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent", ProSoCo, Inc. 3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol", ProSoCo, Inc. 2.06 A. B. C. D. 2.07 A. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish pre- construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Type M or S Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Concrete masonry unit tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140, if required by Architect. � UNIT MASONRY � 04200-3 of 5 APA 08.12 PART 3 3.01 EXECUITON EXAMINATION � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.03 A. 3.04 Do not proceed untii unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. TNSTALLATION - GENERAL Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of 5 minutes after addition of all materials. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not ]ess than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess�and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases ancl recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades. Leave openings for equipment to be installed hefore completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions. Use full size units without cutting where possible. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A. LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with speciiied construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. UNIT MASONRY � 04200-4 of 5 r � i � � � u � � APA 08.12 C� 3.05 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Bond pattem for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. � 3.06 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING � � � ' �� I� A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Poinring: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. Wet all surfaces with water prior to applicarion of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A. TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 04200 � � UNIT MASONRY � 04200-5 of 5 , � ' �� , � L� � � � a � , L_� � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1-GENERAL 1.I SUMMARY A. Secrion Includes: 1. Framing with dimension Iumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. PART2-PRODUCTS Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicabie rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 A. B. C. D. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent_ Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. Application: Treat ali rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions. 2. Species: a. Southem pine; SPIB. b. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. c. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, lmot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. IROUGH CARPENTRY � 06100 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 3. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: l. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Metal framing anchors shall be stainless steel. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. E. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Set rough carpentry to reyuired levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. Framing 5tandard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY ' � � � � � �� u u � a 06100 - 2 of 2 � , � C� , � � � � i � � � � � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 07100 — ROOF EQUIPMENT STANDS PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SI7MMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated roof equipment stands with lead flashing boots. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, dimensions, materials, finishes, attachment, and relationship to adjacent construction. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature including description of materials, finishes, operation, and installation instructions. 3. Warranty: Sample warranty form. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Roof Equipment Stands: Support minimum 350 pounds. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer's 2 year warranty providing coverage against defective materials and worlananship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.1 MANiJFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: F& L Aluminum Parts, Inc., 1710 NW 2nd Court, Unit 7 Pompano Beach, FL 33069, 954-4220-3766. B. Substitutions: Not pernutted. 2.2 MANiTFACTURED LTNITS A. Roof Equipment Stands: Heary-duty "Aluminum Stand" 1. 18" high with lead flashing boots. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Set units plumb and level, without warp and rack. C. Secure to supporting construction. END OF SECTION 07100 � ROOF EQUIPMENT STANDS � 07100 - 1 of 1 � � ' � � ll � � � � � L__I � � � APA 08.12 SECTION 07200 — ROOF PENETRATION CURBS PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 WORK CONDITIONS A. Do not apply the Pro Pack two part urethane pourable sealer if rain is expected within four hours after application time. 1-Part Pourable Sealer is not adversely affected by rain immediately after application. The roof surface should be dry during installation. B. Do not apply Pro Pack two part urethane pourable sealer below 40° F(4° C). Cold temperatures can result in slow or incomplete cure. C. Do not apply over wet or oily surfaces, or uncured concrete. D. Do not apply directly to smooth surfaced A.P.P. modified bitumen products. A piece of granulated A.P.P. shall be installed around the roof peneiration that will extend beyond the ChemCurb a minimum of 2" in all directions. This will provide a proper surface for bonding. Do not install ChemCurbs on TPO membranes without CHEM LINK TPO Primer. TPO Primer must be used to obtain proper bonds_ Under no circumstances shall ChemCurbs be installed on Hypalon membranes. E. Do not use roof cement for night seals around roof penetrations. Roof cement is incompatible with CHEM LINK pourable sealants. Apply a bead of M-1 Stntctural Sealant around the base of each roof penetration to provide a temporary seal. Also, do not prime penetrations with asphalt primer. Apply additional M-1 Structural Sealant to the cleaned penetration, extending from the base of the penetration to a minimum of 3"above the Base. Tool the M-1 smooth. M-1 shall be applied to new penetrations in the same manner. F. In many instances, asphalt roof mastics and other sealants have been applied to the roof penetrations that extend above the profile of a ChemCurb. These sealants can act as a bond breaker and cause the Pro Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer to separate from the penetrations. G. It is imperative that the contractor remove as much of the contaminants as possible. The M-1 will act as a primer for the Pro Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer and will seal any residual contaminants that could adversely affect the pourable sealants. In order to give the M-1 sufficient time to cure, it is recommended that the M-1 (as a primer) be applied to the penetrations before the ChemCi�rbs are set in place and the Pro Pack is rnixed. If large rectangular ChemCurbs are being installed, allow tbe M-1 to set and gain strength for a minimum of 1 hour before fitling the ChemCurb. PART 2- DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Examine all ChemCurb packages and containers upon delivery to make sure they are not damaged. Do not use any unlabeled products. If any products are unlabeled, notify CHEM LINK at (800)-826-1681. B. If ChemCurb products are stored in an unheated area during freezing conditions, make sure they are brought to room temperature 24 hours before use. The shelf life of unopened containers is one year from batch date printed on cans. C. Do not expose any of the ChemC�rb products to moisture during storage. PART 3- CHEMCURB STANDARD SIZES AND ACCESSORIES A. Standard ChemC�rb sizes are 7.5" i.d. and 5" i.d. round curbs. Each ChemCurb is 2" high. � B. ChemCurb Straights are available in 6" and 12" lengths. These are used to make the ChemCurb longer. The 6" and 12" sections fit both the 7.5"i.d. and the 5"i.d. curbs. � ROOF PENETRATION CURBS 07200 — 1 of S ' APA 08.12 C� B. E. LJ Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � ChemC�rb Corners are used to make box shaped curbs. Used with the Straights, ChemCiirbs can be made to your own size specifications right on the job site_ If multiple penetrations are present in one ChemCurb, a 1" space should be maintained between penetrations and the inside edge of the ChemCurb. ChemClzrbs are made of weather and U.V. resistant gray polyester resin. Fitting cuts to any of the ChemCurb sections can be easily done with a power saw and masonry blade. Eye protection shall be worn while cutting at all times. PART 4 - SURFACE PREPARATION 4.1 SINGLE-PLY (E.P.D.M., P.V.C. etc.) All dirt, dust and other contaminants such as, but not limited to, water, ice, oil, grease, animal fat and industrial solvents shall be thoroughly cleaned away from the application area. Wipe the area with denatured / 100% rubbing alcohol and allow drying. Do not use splice wash or gasoline. NOTE: DO NOT USE CHEMCURBS ON TPO MEMBRANES WITHOUT CHEM LINK TPO PRIMER. TPO PRIMER SHALL BE APPLIED FROM THE BASE OF THE PENETRATION EXTENDING BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE CHEMCURB, ONE INCH IN ALL DIRECTIONS. TPO PRIMER WILL NOT WORK ON HYPALON MEMBRANES. CHEMCURBS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON HYPALON MEMBRANES UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. 4.2 4.03 GRANULATED S.B.S AND A.P.P MODIFIED BITUMEN As described above in section 4.01, prepare the surface of the application area as described in that section. Due to the texture of the granulated surface, the ChemCurb can be applied directly to the granulated surface of the membrane. It is not required to clean the surface of the membrane with denatured/rubbing alcohol. Due to poor granule adhesion, 1-Part Pourable Sealer should be used exclusively when installing ChemC�rbs on any granulated membrane_ NOTE: APPLY A VERY THIN BEAD OF M-1 STRUCTURAL SEALANT TO THE OUTSIDE BASE OF THE CIIEMCURB AND TOOL IT SMOOTH, MAKING SURE TO SEAL ALL VOIDS AND GAPS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A BEAD OF 1-PART POURABLE SEALER (APPLIED FROM 28 OZ. CARTRIDGE) BE APPLIED OVER TOP OF THE BEAD OF M-1. THE 1-PART POURABLE SEALER WILL HELP OBTAIN PROPER GRANULE ADHESION. 4.3 PENETRATIONS INSIDE THE CHEMCURB W ith a wire brush and scraper, thoroughly clean and remove all loose roof cement, mastics, coatings, scaled rust and caulking that may be adhered to the penetrations inside the ChemCurb. Ff any fresh roof cement is present, it must be removed completely. These products act as a contaminant and will adversely affeet the bonding of the new sealant that will be applied. As an additional precaution, apply M-1 Structural Sealant around the penetration starting at the base of the penetration. Tool the M-1 smooth around the entire circumference of the penetration(s), extending a minimum of 3" above the roof surface, or beyond the point where any mastics or sealants may have been previously applied. Tool the M-1 smooth to an approximate thickness of 1/8". ROOF PENETRATION CURBS 07200 — 2 of 5 � � , � APA 08.12 � , Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations NOTE: DO NOT PRIME ANY PENETRATIONS INSIDE THE CHEMCURB WITH ASPHALT PRIMER. THIS CAl�' ADVERSELY AFFECT THE BONDING PROPERTIES OF THE NEW SEALANT. P.ART 5-APPLICATION OF THE CHEMCURB 5.1 PRINIING � In order to prevent water infiltration at the roof penetration, apply a bead of CHEM LINK M-1 Structural Sealant around the base of all penetrations that are inside the ChemCurb. Apply additional M-1 to the penetrations, starting at the base and extending a minimum of 3" above , the roof or 1/2" above the point where previous sealants may have been installed. Tool the M-1 smooth, covering the entire circumference of the penetration(s). DO NOT USE ROOF CEMENT! � 5.2 INSTALLATION � � a �� If necessary (on a large ChemC�xrb) pre-cut the ChemCurb Accessory Straights and set them in place "dry" with the ChemG�rb Corners around the penetration/s to ensure a proper fit. On standard-sized ChemCurbs there will only be two pieces that will form a circle. Hold the first section (or curved section} of the ChemC�rb "flat side up", and apply a 1!4" bead of M-1 Structural Sealant to the entire bottom perimeter and an additional bead down the center of the ChemCurb section. M-1 shall also be applied to the scarf joints. Place the frashly treated section into place on the prepared surface, and press it down firmly. Apply M-1 to the sacond section (or succeeding sections for large ChemCurbs) as described above. Press the sections together and down firmly. Apply additional M-1 to any voids. Neatly tool any excess M-1 that extrudes from the scarf joints. NOTE: ALWAYS MAINTAIN A DISTANCE OF 1" BETWEEN PENETRATIONS AND THE INSIDE EDGE OF THE CHEMCURB IN ORDER TO OSTAIN A PROPER SEAL. , 53 , � When the entire ChernCurb is assembled and pressed into place, a 1/4" round continuous bead of M-1 Structural Sealant shall be applied around the outside base of the ChemCurb_ All joints and seams shall be tooled to a smooth finish with the applicator stick that is included with each ChemCurb case. When installing ChemG�trbs on granulated membranes, a thin bead of M-1 shall be applied to the outside of the ChemC�rb and tooled smooth. An additional bead of 1- Part Pourable Sealer should be applied (using 28 oz. Cariridges) over the M-1 to ensure proper granule adhesion. TWO-PART PRO PACK As per mixing instructions on the ChemCurb Pro Pack, mix parts "A" and "B" for a minimum of five minutes, until they become a uniform black. Pour Pro Pack pourable sealant into the ChemCurb until it is completely flush with the top of the ChemCurb. Do not apply Pro Pack if rain is expected within four hours. � ROOF PENE'�RATION CURBS ' 07200 — 3 of 5 APA 08.12 5.4 5.5 1-PART POURABLE SEALER , Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � 1-Part Pourable Sealer can be used instead of Pro Pack in any Chem C%rb. This product is available in 28oz. cartridges, or in two-liter pouches. This product does not require any mixing and unused portions can be sealed and used on future projects. Due to poor granule adhesion, 1-Part Pourable Sealer should always be used in ChemC�rbs installed on granulated surfaces or on any roof penetration tkat is subjected to extreme movement. ROOF WITH MULTIPLE CHEMCURBS On a roof that has many ChemCurbs to be installed, it can be faster to install the sections of several ChemCurbs and then fill them all at once. This can help reduce the possibility of having unused Pro Pack pourable sealant left in a can. Make sure all temporary seals around the roof penetrations were sealed with M-i Structural Sealant. NOTE: DO NOT USE ROOF CEMENT FOR TEMPORARY SEALS. When assembling large rectangular ChemCurbs, allow the M-1 Structural Sealant to cure for a minimum of 1 hour before filling the ChemCurb with Pro Pack or 1-Part Pourable Sealer. This will prevent any of the curb sections from�rupturing due to tke hydrostatic pressure ofthe large volume of pourable sealer. ChemCurbs can be made in any size or shape using ChemCurb straights and/ar corners. There is no maximum size limit to a ChemCurb. 5.6 POSITIVE SLOPE INSTALLATION/PIPES THROUGH A VERTICAL WALL It is imperative to maintain the 2"depth of the sealer inside the enrire ChemCurb. This can be accomplished by installing the ChemCurb around the penetration according to normal installation specifications. On pipes extending through a vertical wall, it is imperative to apply the external bead of M-1 Siructural Sealant around the outside base perimeter and tool it quickly. The M-1 on the bottom of the curbs sections and the extemal bead of M-1 will hold the ChemCurb in place. Fill the entire ChemG�rb with CHEM LINK's low modulus DuraLink sealant. Hand tool the DuraLink to a metal smooth finish flush with the top of the ChemCurb. If the sloped roof is a Kynar coated roof, assemble and fill the entire ChemCurb with DuraLink. PART 6-10 YEAR LIMITED MATERIALS WARRANTY When applied in accordance with the CHEM L1NK application instructions using only CHEM LINK materials, CHEM LINK, Inc. wanants its ChemCurb System against leaks for ] 0 years from the date of installation. Our liability under this warranty, and buyer's sole and exclusive remedy, will be to provide replacement product free of charge. CHEM LINK, Inc.'s total liability for sale of this product shall in no event exceed the original cost of the product. CHEM LINK, Inc. shall not be liable for: cost of labor to apply the product; damage to roofing, otlier structures, or interior contents of buildings; or for any other damages, wkether direct, incidental, or consequential. ROOF PENETRATION CURBS , ' � L� � � r � ' �l � � I_ J � �� 07200 — 4 of 5 � Ci ' � , , , ' � � � a , , , � , � ' � , APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations This warranty is in lieu of aIl other warranties, expressed and implied, including the warranties of inerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and warranties in tort. CHEM LINK, Inc. also disclaims any liability under any non-warranty theory of liabiliTy, including, but not limited to contractual, tor[, or Iiability. Neither the scope of the wananty nor liability thereunder may be extended except in writing executed by a duly elected officer of CHEM LINK, Inc. of Schoolcraft, Michigan. END OF SECTION 07200 � ROOF PENETRATION CURBS 07200 — 5 of 5 LJ ' � , , 11 � � �� ' � � ' � � � ' , APA 08.12 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated PART 2 -PRODUCTS Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET IN5ULATION A. Manufactwers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Coming. B. Faced, R-30 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. 3.2 A. B. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated Install insularion that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to rain at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated Cut and fit rightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce ttiickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thiclaiess. INSTALLATION OF IN5ULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. R-30 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install over acoustical tile ceiling. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 of 1 , r � � � i � ' ' APA 08.12 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART1-GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mecbanical Renovations 1.1 SUNIMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants tl�at establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.I MANUFACTUI2ERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be ' incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. � ' CJ ' �J , � 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibitity: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealani Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to AS"I'M C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference ' JOINT SEALANTS ' 07920 - 1 of 4 APA 08.12 ' Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations ' to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact witb food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - la. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP l. d. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T(traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C(closed-cell material with a surface skin), O(open-cell material), B(bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 A. B. C. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adbesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. Masidng Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacenttojoints. PART 3 - EXEC[TTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS r ' , �� S � , � u ' CJ ' ' ' ;L J 07920 - 2 of 4 ' ' , ' ' , , ' �l ' ' ,� ' ul LJ , ' ' ' APA 08_12 2. Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of j oint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufachu-er's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Maslcing Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 A. B: C. � E. F. INSTALLATION Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: l. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each j oint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-secrional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of join� 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. , JO1NT SEALANTS , 07920 - 3 of 4 APA 08.12 � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations , G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Seatants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior and exterior perimeter joints. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 of 4 ' � �J ' APA 08.12 ' , , Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART 1 - GENERA.L 1.1 SLTNIlVIARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath solid-plaster bases. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. r , � � � ' , ' ' ' , t , 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before stuccoing, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater tkan 40 deg F(4.4 deg C). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specifed. 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. B. C. ACCESSORIES General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number ofplaster coats required. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC, if required. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II]. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 of 2 APA 08.12 2.5 A. B. C. 1 Pier 6d Retail Mechanical Renovations , PLASTER MIXES General: Comp2y with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. l. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6, kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: 1. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: 5ingle base coats for twacoat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime_ Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cemenritious material (sum of separate volumes of each component materiaI). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.2 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float sand finish to match Architect's sample. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ' 1 LJ , � ILJ .� ' � - I� � L__1 ' � ' 09220 - 2 of 2 ' ' i � ' � � � t � � � ' APA 08.12 SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal ceiling grid system. 2. Acoustical panels. B_ Related Sections: C. Division Ol : Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): ]. A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire_ 2. C635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. 3. C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. 4. E1264 - Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. B. Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) - Ceiling Systems Handbook. C. Undeiwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: l. Samples: a. 12 x 12 inch acoustical panel samples. b. 12 inch long suspension system samples showing each profile. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing laboratory that acoustical panels meet fire hazard classification requirements. , 1.4 QUALITY ASSURA.NCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section. r-, i � ' ' � L_1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install in approximately same conditions of temperature and humidity as will prevail after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 2 percent of acoustical panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Suspension System: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (www.armstrong.comlceilings) 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. (www.chicago-metallic.COm) 3. USG Corporation. (www.usg.com) B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Acoustical Units: � • ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS �, i, 09512 - 1 of 3 APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (www.armstrong.com/ceilings) Certainteed Corporation (www.eertainteed.com) 3. USG Corporation. (www.usg.com) C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Suspension Grid System: Prelude XL 15/I6" exposed tee as manufactured by Atmstrong World Industries. 1. ASTM C635, intermediate duty, die cut, interlocking ends. 2. Grid type: Exposed T. 3. Material: Cold rolled aluminum. 4. Runners: 1-1/2 inches high, 15/16 inch exposed width, slotted profile. 5. Perimeter molding: Angle. 6. Finisb: Factory applied enamel paint, sprayed and baked, white color. B. Acoustical Panels: 1. Source: Ceramaguard unperforated, Armstrong World Industries. 2. Size: 24 x 24 inches x 5/8 inch thick. 3. Edge configuration: Square. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application. B. Hanger Wire: l. ASTM A641, minimum 12 gage galvanized steel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install ceilings in accardance with ASTM C636 and CISCA Handbook. B. Minimize panels less than one half size_ C. Install molding around perimeters and abutting surfaces. Miter molding at exterior corners; cut flanges and bend web to form interior corners. D. Space hanger wires maximum 48 inches on center. Install additional hangers where required to support light fixtures and ceiling supported equipment. E. Do not suspend hangers directly from metal deck. Attach steel channel horizontally to adjacent framing members; place hanger at regular spacing. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes, and conduit. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers: 1. Reinforce nearest related hangers to span extra distance, or: 2. Suspend steel channel horizontally beneath duct or equipment; place hanger at regular spacmg. H. Install main tees at maximum 48 inches on center. 1. Install cross tees to form 24 x 24 inch modules. Lock cross tees to main tees. J. Support ends of tees on flange of perimeter molding. K Place acoustical panels with edges resting flat on suspension grid L. Cutting Acoustic Units: . 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim and around penetrarions. 2. Locate cuts to be concealed. 3. Cut and field paint exposed edges of reveal edge units to match factory edge. � � , ' � � r � , ' ' ' ' , ' � � ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09512 - 2 of 3 � , ' � � � � � � � � � � � � ' � � � i ' APA 08.12 Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions to match factory finish. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09512 - 3 of 3 � � APA 08.12 � � � � � � � � � � � �� SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Owner will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed baze and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: ►� � 4. 5. a. Toilet partitions. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. d. Distribution cabinets. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FIv�, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. PAINTING 09960 -1 of 5 AFA 08.12 � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs}. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Owner will fumish color chips for surfaces to be coated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Names: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Porter Paint Company (Paint Schedule is based on Porter Paint. If another manufacturer is submitted, submit both Porter Data Sheets along with Data Sheets for paint proposed to be used. All products must be equivalent or exceed quality of Porter Products scheduled for Architect's approval.} 2. ICI Dulux Paints. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substxates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A_ Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3Z PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted if removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treahnents, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. PAINTING � , � � � � � � 09900 - 2 of 5 � � , � APA 08.12 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovarions 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specifed. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, challc, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents_ Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface prepararion. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. Power spray exterior of existing building to be repainted. b_ Deterrnine allcalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instnections. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned laiots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recornmended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fll holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood f ller. Sand smooth when dried D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of unifortn density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface flm and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. I. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forrnation of a durable paint fiIm. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used 4. The te�n "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. � PAINTING � 09900 - 3 of 5 APA 08.12 : � � E. F_ G �� Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations � Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicatars according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finisb coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, ar other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. PAINTING 09900 - 4 of 5 'J � :� � � � � , �� APA 08_12 � � � � r � � � � � � Pier 60 Retail Mechanical Renovations 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. l. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Sand Float Stucco and repainting of existing building: 1. First Coat: "PorterLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 PortersepY' Bxterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 PortersepY' Exterior Satin Acrylic B. Hardie Fiber Cement Trim and Soffits: 1. First Coat: #515 Series Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 PortersepY' Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 PortersepY' Exterior Satin Acrylic 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Interior Walls: Paint patches to match existing paint finish. END OF SECTION 09900 � PAINTING � 09900 - 5 of 5 , � � � � � � � I � � � � � � � SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACTBOND .....................................................................................................................1 CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6 PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 7 AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 8 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9 PROPOSAL.................................................................................................................................10 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 23 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL .............................................................................................................14 � SectionV.doc P e i � � 7/26/2012 ' ' � � ' L_I � Ct��TRACT Thrs CONTRAC'T made and entered into thi� /�_ day� �f ��YI1(Ntil' , 20� by and between the C'ity of Cie�n��ater. Fiorid�, a rnunieipai c��rparati�n, hereinaft�r desi�nated as t�e ,�City', and CERTiIS BL'=FLDER�. I'�tC,, af the �ity: �F TAt�iPA Counxy of HILLS�ORO�CH and State t�f Florida, hereinafter desi�nated as the "Co;ntraetc�r". VViT1�E�SETH: That t[�e part�es to t��y car�traci each in G��sidc�a�i�n �€ th� undertakin�s, prc��ni�s anti �gceeir�ents on the part o#`;ihe otf�er i�er�in cantained, do hereb�° unciert�ke, prornise and a�ree as foll�vWs: The Cantractor, �nd` hi� t�r its successars, assig�s, ex�eutors or adminisiratars, in consrderation ot t1�� sums of m�ney as herein after set forth ta be paid b;° the Citv as�d to che Contc�c.t�r, sha[f st�d will at th,e',,,� own cost and �xpense perfarm all labt>r; iumish a(1 materiais, tools and �qui}�ment ft�r the fol lt�wing: P'IER bE� CtJ�l�ESST(}�i BCIiLDINC� S'TaRAGE �ABDITiU:ttS (0$-(i064-PR -C) IIwt THE A�1+IU�#�"'I' U�` rDIVE HLINDRED FT�'� SI� THUU�A1kb S1J� H�1VTlREi} NINETY C?NE D{?LLARS .4ND �aEVEI'�T7� CENTS $1'S6,691.'i� In accordance with such pri�posal and technical supplemental speci�cations and such c�ther special ' prpvisions ar�d dravvings. if an}�, which will k� submitted by the Citj�, tta�ether with any advertisemen�. 'rnstructior�s te� bidders, general cc�nditians, proposat and band, whach may be _herr�tQ attacheci, at�d any drawin�s if any, v��hich rnay be herein refeered toa are hereby made a part of this ' contraGt, and ail of said w�ocic to be perfvrn�eti and comp[efied by the contraeior and its suc�essc�rs and assigns �h�ti be futly campleted in a�nt�d and wc�rkmanlike manner to the s�tisfaction of the City. 1 ' ' � ' � ' If t1�e Cnntract�ar �hotzld fail tc� compiy �vith any o#� the terrns, conditions, provisic�ns c�c sti�puiat�ans as cont�ined :here�n �vit�lin the tir�e speci�ed it�r �t�mpletion of the c��ark tc� be perFormed by the Cont�actor, then ti�e Cic��, ma� at its �prion, avail it�elfaf any or alE remedies pr�vi�i�d an its behalf' anc� shal� £�a�re the right tt� prpceed to comptete such w�ork as Gontractor is a�li�ated t� p�eform in accorc(af�ce with the provisiar►s as eontair�ed hereirt, THE C(iN I'RACTOR A��iD HTS OR ITS SLTCCES�QF;S AND ASSiGN4 I)ti�� HEREBY AG�tEE T(7 A�SL�ME THE DEF'EhSE QF ANY LEGAL ACTIO�v '�i1�IiCH �1A"� BE BRQtJ�I�i'T A�ALNST fiH� CITY ,4� A RESULT ()F 'THE �t)3'3TRACTfli�:'S ACT� �ITTES ARISI�G 4UT 4F THIS �C}NTRACT A�+iD F'�j"It`i"HERMORE. IN CO?�SI`DERATTt}l� t}�' THE TEi�S, STIPliLATIC#N� A�i� CO�I?�`['I{)N� AS CONTAIN�L� NFkt�:1i�, A�RE�S TO HQI:F1 THE GITY FREE ANII� HARNILESS FRQM AN� �►ND ALL CL.AiMS FUR DAMA�ES, C+D�TS fJ�" SL'ITS, Ji.�i�Gi4fiENT5 C7R I�ECRFE� R��U�Ti"�� R�l� �hY CLAIMS MADE UI�D�R THI� CC�I�'Tit�tGT AGAI�TST THE CIT�` 4R 'THE CCINTRACTOR QR T%iE C:�i�TRACTt�R'S St,,rB-C+E�i�T�2ACT4RS, AGEi�TT�►, �ERI�ANTS QR EMPL�YEES R.�Si�LTING FROI�i A�i"IV'ITIES BY THE AF�REI��ENTiONED COhTR�CTt}R, SL'B-CQNTRACTOR, AGENT SER'�'ANTS C?R EMFL+�YEE�. rontracc:d�e� Pa�s.: c,¢>ts 7�zt�:zUiz Ct?NTRA�T {?i [n addition io tkxe fare�,oing provis�orts, the Gontractoe agrees tt� eonf+��n to ihe falla��ing fequirerr�e«t�, In eor�nection with the perfanriance of rvortc under this c4n�ractx che Cc�ntra�tor ��recs nc�t tc� tfis�riminate �gainst any emplc�yee or applicanc for empl�yment bec�us� of rac�, sex; reli�iQn, cvic�r, cir na�ic�n�l 4ri�in. Tt�e afaresaid prc�vision shall ir�clude, but not be limited to, tf�t. follov�iai�, �rnplay rnertt, uFgcad�ng, derrtot'son$ ar crartsfer recruitrnent or recruitment aduereising, Eay-e>�` Qr termination, rates of pay (3r Othec f�srtns of cornpensatron; and selection far training, including a�are��tices�ip. �The Contractor agr�e� tc� pvst hereafter in conspiGU�us praces; available fc�r empl�}�ees ar apptican�s f�r employcnent, nt�tices t� be pro�i�e�d byr the contracting officer settin� forth the �ravi�ic�ns of tFte non-diserimination ct�u�e. The Corttractt�r further ��rees tc� insert the focegt�ing provisions in att contr�ccts hereu�cier, includ��u� conttr��ts or agreetnents with labos t�nians andlor worker's representatives, except sub-cc�r�tractars fc�r star�c�rd �vmrttercial supplies or raw materials. it i� rn;utu�l{� ��reed between the p�t'res hereto that time is of t�te essenc� c�f this contrac� and in t}�e ever�t that the work to be performed by the Contractor is nc�c comptet+ed within the t�r�ne stiputated herein, it is tE�en furth�r a�reed that che �ity rnay deduct �rorn suci� surn� c�r �crmpensation as rna� be due t�r the Contractor the sum of �1.{10�i,fl�i per dav for each day that the wortc ta be perfanrned by the �ancractar �m�ins incomplete 6eyQ�d the time limit speci�ed hereirr, �vhich sum of �t,ti{►f�.i1[t t�er d, a� s��il r�nl�� n�i s�lci�� r�pr�sent damages w�hieh the City has sustaincd l�v reason;af the fa'sl�re af the Cc�nFractor to co�nplete the wflric within the rime stipulated, it bein� iurther agreed that this sum is r�cst tt� t�e cc�r�strueci a� a penalty= but is anEy to [�e cc�nstn�ed as liquidated d�ma�es for faiiure of the �ontra�:.tor to �corr�ptete �d perfQrtn all w�rk within the cirne p�riod as speci�ed in this cc�ntraet. tt is furtfi�r rnutually agreed between the �it� and the C�ntractar that if, any t��ne after th� executio�s of this �r�ntract �nd the surety� bond which is ai�aehed h�reto fc�r the fait�ful performance c�f the ter�ns anci c�ndit�t�ns a� contained herein by the �or�tractor, that the City shall at any �ime deem the suret�° or sureties v�on such perfc�rmatace b�ttd t� be unsatisfactory car if, far any reast�n, t#�e 'said bc�nd ceases tc� be adequate in amount tt� cover the p�rformance of tl�e work the Contractor shatt, at his er its own exper�se, v��€thin ten (10} days after receipt af w°ritten natice fram the City to do so, furn'tsh an additic�nal bond t�r �nds in such term and amaunts ancl with such surety or sure�ies as shall be satisfactoru to the Cit�. 'lf sueh an event occurs, n� f€,rth�r payment sl�a{1 E�e made to the Cantractor und�r the terrns an� pra�°isions oi' this contract until suck� new or additianal securit}' bont� guarant�ein� ihe faithfu! per€ormarrce of €he work und�r the Cerrns her�f shal L be r,<c�mpleted and furni��ed to the City in a fc�mn satisf�ctory� tc� it. �'�t�trnct.r�cacx P�z�c 2 0§` i� "�?t±- �� 1 i: ' ' ' COl�TR�CT 4�) IN WITNES� WHE�(1�, che part�es to the ��einent have he�unto set t�aeir han�s and s�als a..r►d have execute.ci thi� Agreernent, it� dupli�ate; Khe day and acar �rst abave wr�tten. CI�'Y QF CLEARW�IT�R IN PIN�LLA�S CQUNT'�, FI.�RIDA B)': �� ,��%'�1�� Witliam B. Hame, i1 Gity Mtana�er Co�ntersign�cl: gy; '��°�� l�f C"i�orge 1�. Cretekt�s_ May�oc (Contractc�r must ir�dicaCe whether Carpc>rltion, Partnecship, Corr�pany or Individual.) (i'he person signing �hai{, in his own handwri#ing, sign che Princip�l's narne, his awn name, and his title; where th� person is si�nine fs�r a Carpocati.ar+, he must. by Affidavit, sho�t�� his a�tharity to bind the Corparation�. ( �,ntracf.aoca Pa�e : ta?' @ � ��yF Attest: Rosemarie —_ i Assistan# Gitv �►ttarnev � �� CEI�Tt1S IiUIL��R.S.I�C, �C�-- �z-�• �-�-�-t- , (Cantr�ctc�c> _ -; .. � :, e � �9 i,'�z� - }�}": ,�, t.�� , ~; G� ,°o.! � �` � t�� 1� f�"�. � • : �; r- �.. ,• ca ... � �,� � �,,., r , �, .� �,: �;�,• , . a� , �z �,'_ti i : GONTRAGTOR'S �FFfDAVIT FOR FI�Ai PAI� �VtFNT rco�rc��,T�ort �o�vtti ST�T� �QF FLORII}A CC}U��TY O�F On this d�y+ personatlY &PPeared l�efore rne, the undersi�n�;d �atharit;r, duiy authariz�d tra ', arirnini:�ee� aaths and take aekno�vlec��.�?nent�, .��o af`ter bein�e cluly stuotrt, de�vs�s and says; ' That he as tt�e �TIiL�} af CERTU� BLTII.DERS. I�C�. a F(orida Carp�ratiort, cvith its prsncipa4 �lace af business lacated at 3a4 � WESTLA�.'�iD A�'E, TAMPA. FL(IRiDA 33b46-17�6 (herein, ti�+: "C'ar�tractor"}. Thai the Contractor was the gener�l contrr�etor under a ct�ntract ehecuted on th� day at , 24 with the CTTY OF CLEARWATER, FL.f�RiI}A, a municipal ccrrporatian, as Owner, and �h�t the C�rttractar was to gerfor�n the constniction of: PIER 6Q CQI�iCE�SION Bi3IL,DII�G STURAGE (08-�Q64PR: -C) FOIi THE SUFvI E3�` ONE H��l�i}RED FIFTY SIX TH4USAI�ID SI� NtINI}RED �JIN�TY t3�3� DQLLARS AND SE4'E�NT�i' CENTS S15b,69i.70 ITh�t said Kcsrk has n�w been ca�mpleced and the Contractc�r has paid and dischar�ed �li sub- ' cdntraetorsf tabacers �nd material men in connection with said wor� and th�re are na liens out�ta�ding of an�° nature ntrr an}� debts �r obligation� that rni�ht be�ome a lien t�r encctmbrartee in cannec�ie►r� ��ith said �ork against fhe described proper�u. ' That he is making t3�is affida�it pursuant ta the requirernents €�f Chapter ?I3, Flari�a Stacut�s, and upc�n cc�nsiderat'ton of the p�ymenr of (Final Fuit Arnount of Cvniract) in ' ful! s�tisfaetian and discharg� of said co�tract. That the Owner is hereb� released frc�m acly claim which �night aris� ouc of said Concract. ' The va=ord "liens" as used in this a�dati��t sh�.11 mean any and ali ar'ssing under the operation of the Flc�ricia Mechanic's [�ien Law as set farth in �hapter'713, FEorida Statutes. ' ' Sr�t�rn �nc� subscrit�d to b�fore me ' Thi� da� of . 2Q ' �i+DTARY PUBLiC ' �� C�rnmissian Expires: ' ' Cantra�t.ac�rL Pa�:e -t «f i> BY: AF�`�A�1'I` � PRESIDENT �,��,�xo i � AFFIDA4'IT (Tc? �ie fr3le�i ir� and e�cecutec� if the bidder is a cQrp�rati�n) STATE 4F FL!QRIDA ) �CIUNTY (iF _____} bein� duiy sufQrn. ciepr�ses and says that hetsh�e is Secretary �f a c�rpc�ratiari ar�anizcd and existing under and hv � irtue vf the law�s crf the Stat� af F(Qrida, �nd ha� ing its �c�ncipal of�'ice at. _M. �he�t �i Nu�rib�x� City: Countv 5tate A�ant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute baol�.s and by°-iav��s af' (?�lame of Ccarp�r�tion} Ai�i�nt further says that is {(��eer's i�taane) {T'it3e} o.ft}�e r�rpar�tion, is duly authc�riz�d ta sign the Propvsal for far saie4 corp�ratian by virtue of (state wheth�r a pravision of bv laws or a Resolution of the Board ati -- Qir��tars. [fby Resc�Iution give date of'�dc�pti�n}: Sw�rn to beft�re me this day af 2Q . A€fiant Notary Public Typelprintistamp r►arne ofNotary Title �r rantc, and S�riai N�.. if at�y �"6�rstsact.dcu� i'sge- i� c�i 9 � "i26r�Qi'��1 NON-ClJLLt.i�I(}� AFFID�►�'IT STA'TE C3F �'LORI�A COUNT'�' QF ) of �ing, first duly sworn, d�pvses a€�d sa�°s thac h� is #he �Sartv making the foregoing Propasal �r Bid; tt�at sach Sid is genuine and not cailus�ve or sha�rt: th�t said bi�i�l�r is rtat financiaJly interested in car atherwis�: a�liat�tl in a�usinesa �;ay c�vttli �n3� other biclder an the sarne enntract, that �aid bidder h�s not cotluded, conspired, ccannived, ar agr�ed, direct[� or indirectty, w=ith any �iciders or persan, to put in a sham bid or that such other persan sttail refrain frt�rn biddin�, �nd h�.r not in any manner, directly �r indirectl�. �c�u�ht: by a�re�rt��nt c�r cc�llu�ic�n, Qr communicati�n or conference, with �.ny person, to fix the bid price or affiant oc any Qtl�er bic�der, or tQ fix any� averhead, prafit or cost elernent of said bid pricc. car that c�€' any vih�r bidd�r. �r tc� serure �n� a�l�anta�e a�inst tfa� Gity of CIearwater. Fiorida, or any person ar pers4ns i�terest�d in the p�opc>s�c� conu�aci; an�d that all staterrlents coniain�d in �ECi proposai c�r bid are tirue� �nd fuc�h�r, that such L�idder has nat directJy� or indirectly submitted this bid, or th� cantents thereof.. ar divutget� ir�forrnation ar ti�t� relative therec� ta an� assaeiatian or t� any rnerr�bzr c�r a�ent thereof. Swvrn t� �nd subscribed before me this day of Af�ant � N�tary Public C csntraet.�i�u�a Aag� e� c�}' t� '�`�bl20 i� I'K(}PQSAL (�) TO TIIE CITY OF GLEAFtV�ATER, �'LORIDA, for PIER 60 CONC�SSION' BtiFLT3Il�i� ST4RACE �I3DITIONS and dQin� such othee work incid�ent�l thereto, all in accc�r�lance with the ��ntract documents, marked PIER 6Q CQNCESSTON BUILDIb1G S'i'�RAGE ADI7�ITIONS Everv bidder must take notice of t�e fact that even chou�� his prQpc�sal be accepted and the doc�urmentis si�;ned by the bidder to w�hom an award is rnade and bv thase afficials autht�rized to do so on be�a�f of the City c��' C(e�rv�at�r, Florid�< tihat nQ such award or signin� shalt � cor�sider�d a bir�ttin� �t�ntract w�ithout a ecrti�cate from the �'inance I)irector that funds are a�lailable to cover the cc�st of the �vorl� �o be done� car withaut the appc�c�val of th� City Attorney as to the fc�rm and legaliry af tl�e eantract ar�d att the pertinent docutnents reiating thereta having �en a�prave�i bv said City AtEOrney; and such bi�ider is hereby charged with this notice. The si�ner of` the Pro�sal, as bidder, aiso d�clares that the o�ly pe�on. p�ersor�s, cc�mpany Qr pa�t,ies ', in�erested in thts Aroposal. �re narned in this Pmposal, that he has carefuliy exarr�ined the Adv�rtise�nent, In�tructie�ns to I�idders, �ontract Spe�i#icatic�ns, Pians, Supplemental Speeificatians. General C;��nditions,;Sp�cial Provisions. and Contract Bond, that he or his representative i�as r�ade suc�1 ,, investigation � is necessar�� ta deterrrr�ne the chaxr�cter and �tent of #h�e ti�vark and he grc�pases and agr�� that if th� Prop�sal %: sccepted, i�� ili c;�niract w�=ith r.i�� City of Ctear��t�z', Fiarid�, �n t�c� fi�r� of cflntract; hereto annex�d, to pravide the necessarv labor, matcrials, �n�chine�y�, equipment, toc�ls car ' apParatus, do alI the wartc required ta complete Ehe cc�niract �ithin the tirne menci��ed in the General Conditions and accarding to the requiremertts af the City of Cteau-�rater. Flarida, as her�in and hereinaR�r set forth, and furnish �he required surety bonds far the follov��ing pric�s to wit: ' � r � � � t �� t'nntncl.doia Pa�e 7 ��#' 13 �:2�,4nr:r � � � , ' A,�IDAVIT {To be filled in and e�+e�uts�d if Ehe bidd�r is a c�rporatian� STAT� OF Il�A�DA ) CUVN'�"Y 0►�' €�s��r��i� ) Sr��r�� ,��r�� ein� d�a1Y swnrn, deposes anti says �hat hels% is a cc��oratian or�i�ed an+d ' its prin�cipai o�� t. ��d �,. ��f#�r�d ��. ' � �J ' , �I ' ' r ,' under �ad is�' vir�ktie af the 1�ws of the .. and Af�i�uc�t f.rutltc�r says t�at he is faanilia�r with � recor�s, mirtute boollsg a�d i�y-Ia�vs �i:. ��r�� `rlci�r��< In�, . �i� �f C�rporaiic�n) Aff�nt ft�tth� says that i�avid �t�awt�r i$ Pr��id�� (C}#�ce�rs N�) (Title) c�f khe c�arpor�?t�s��y �s ��iy at�ii�a " tc► �i� the I'r� far F�i�r �� d B��rt � fcn s�id ca�tio�t by viiivie of` �r�,v�� sf t�+� ��v� f�r C�rt�� u�ld�� I�c, (� �+�f t�y l�ws �r a R�It�tic�n ��' 1� Board c�f If by Re�olcr#ic�� ive r�e ta� ��tit�n). �.� '`�°�: a� `X �...��.�:.. .4�'iant � �. � . . - . � , � - �� . . � � � ,� t � , � � � � . .� �� t , � �� e � '� �� "�' �°�� '` '� � , - ., v r � .� . ^ {.��' r Sr,ct�rznV.doc 8afI5 Title ar rank, and Seri� I�To,, if �ny 71�5l2Q�2 1�iC7►N i1�USICYIY AF�`IDA'VIT .'�'�"ATE t)F FLORIDA � t , ��d �t��e+�er b�eing, first d�ly swom, deposes and says ihat h� is . � � _ � � �c party �aking the foregai�g Propasat �r B€d; thst �uch Bid is ger�uine �d nc�t coliusi�e or sl�m; t�it s�id bicidear i� not �ially i,ate,�ste� in �r oth�rwisc affi�iate�i in a business �ay with any vther bici�r on the same cotat�c� that �id bid��r mr�ot coliu�sd, o��ired, ec�nrt�sveti, +�r agrr�ed� dir�etly cu is�3i�c#ly, with a�y t�idd�rs or person, t+� put in a sham bid ar tt�t suclx ot�x persan shall �fi�ti�t. frar� bidding, and � nat rt� a�y manner, directl� c�� in,�i�y, s�ughi by �t c�r co33usion, o� cominu�ication ar confc�nce, �+itt� anY pers�n, t� �x thc bid p�ice or affiant csr any oti�eir �idder,: €�r to fijs a�y avenc�ad„ profi# ox east ete�n�nt af $aid bid price, or thai of a��y €►ther bi�dr'l�er, ar to sec� any adva�ttage a�nst th� City crf C�I��r, �iorida�, ox miy pexsoa s�r persons i�rter�ed in the pmpa� �on�C; aac� that ati st��nents ccmtainod in said �posal ot bid are true; an,d fi�rtl�a; that-�uch t�iride� tzas nat dir�ct�� or indix�ctly sut�mitted � bid, ar the contents %�r diwlg+ecl �om�atio� ar data rre�tive t�iere�v tc� aany ass�ci�tiox� ox tc� �n.y m�r�ber oc ag�ni thh+creof. e �.,, �tl .,__'-� `':�- -,��....�--.•t ,Aat�'i�nt Sw�t�n ta �ci subscribed before me this � day of �`�, �;��, , 2Q f�. '�� .i�d,�,� �.. �..��.<# Nr�tary `Pub�ic ��a� ��,,,��t,u,� c#"''"�a,. SHAR4N A. SUMlN�R -�� `��'�"z Notiti� f��4l� - �t1C# Df �3te�td�� . . �Ny,R �`�F# �y G�mr�, Expiees �r�v 8. �t113 '%'�,a� �ro;;• Comtrtiss+nn � li[i 93�93� 3actionV.c%� Page 9 of 15 7t�� 1:2 � ` �.,�� i�� ro � cr� c�F c��wA�� .cr��,, �� PI�R 6U C'ONCE�SI�tN BUl'i�D�T�i� STdRA�E AD13'TIC3N P�I.�G�'I� N'i�. Q8-84C4-PR-C and d�ai;ng s�h t�er wm�c incidental t6�t�eto, alt in �cc�tdance with t�ic rroatraGt cic��m,ents, m�l P'YE�t b1� GUN�ESSI�N BT3II.DII�1� �'IC+C��AGE AII��TIt?W PRV3E�'T l�ttl. 0�-40�4-�'R-C Every b�ddet musi E�1ce n�tic� ofthhe fact ih�tk eve�t thoug� his pr�pvs� be acvepted �ui t� doc�ts signed by t�e t�iddcr to w1�om an awarci �s zraad� a�nci by ttx�se officials aertthorri�ed to dc� st� o� �ie.�if�f. the Ciiy oi Ci c�r, Flcrrida, tl� no suci� a�ard c�r'sig�ting shall be cc�rrside�red a b�t+� cc�t� without a certifRc�te fmm the Finance L}��ector t�t £�u�s3s ar� available #o cover �e c�st of tb�e wt�rk to Y� ci��t� �rr v�iitl��t t� �p�v�t ca#` t�e C:ity Atta�y as to the forna and 1e�ali�#y1 of � ca�trac� a� a#� t1n� p�'tinent; doc.�mea�t� r�[at�iing t�er�to having been ap�tr�v+ed by said City Attorn��y, ar�ci su�h biddez� i� �by chac�g�d witth tt2tfis nc�ic�e. 1h�e �kga� of` tl� P�pc�sal; as bi�ldsr, atso de� that ti�: ontY ��, P�� Y � l��' �nterested in this ProPos�t. are t�amec� in t� T�r�sal, that �e has ca�r�#uli� �e�i tt�e Adv�rti�sem;�t, It�strc�ctios� to Bidde�s, Cantr�ct Sp�cific�tions, Flat�s, Su�lemc��at Spe�i�c��ans,. Ge�n�al Cc�ndiCic�z�, �p�ci�l ��c�� i Cc��t ��t� #h�i t�� c�r � r�p�t�iive has ` sc�c�, investi�ation as is �cessaiy to det�rmin� th� c�et�ar aa� ��t�t caf �e w� a�t t�e �� ' ag�s `tb�at if the P�posal �e acrepted, he wi�l �n�ct with � Ciry ctf �l �, F�aricie� in tEa� fc�rm; af cantract; he�eto a�nexed, to pmvkd� ��s� I�bc�r, a7r��, r�� . ��iPme��, �als c�a• �►p�ar�ius, do ai� tl� w�k rsquire�i ta comgl�#e t1� a�ntract within the time mentic�� in t!� Gener�i'. Cor�iition� anil �dii�g tc� the c�qurrements t�f the City c�f Clearwater, Flaic� ss i�iu� an�: �reinaft�r set farlh, and finaish th�e required siu+�.3► bt�nds fc�r t6e fa�lowing prices #o wi� Sc�tio�►Y,doc Pa�e l0 of I S 3S�tiJ2Ql:2 ' r � PRQPQ�SAL �z) ' If t%� for�oing Pro�i s�al1 be accce�#ecl by ihe City of Clear�tra�er} Flari�, and t�e uxxlersign� s1�1 fail tt� exe�t� �. satisf'actary contc�ct as sta►t�ci in the A�ivertis�rne�t h�rein a�tached, th�r� tht� Cit� may, at it,� opbit�n deiermute that �e ca�c�er�i has a�sdos�d t� �z�t��t, anri �rr�uttpc�n ti�is s� ' shail be null a�id void, and tl� certi�ed �check or bond accampsn�ng this Praposai, shall � ft�rf�it� ta become the pr�peaty af the City flf �leaxwater, Flarida, aad the fuil amount of sai�l c�ie�� str�1� be: 'n�taia�cd b� t}� City, � if the Fmpt�sat Bond be given, tl� fautl �u�t c�f s��h bond �Ps,�,ti � p�id � tl� ' City as stip��ed or liquidat�d dam�ges; otherwis�, the bcmd ar c�ti�ied c�ec% � �ua8 #his Pmposa�, r�r t� amcxint of said �h�k, shall be ret�aed tc� t�e cuu%r�i � s�ifa� �. ' ' �_ J � � � LJ � � � � � ' Attac�ted hereto is a bon�d or �ertified chock t�n r�� b�a�ts� ��d ��r �tctd�r�d�r,� � i Bank, for tt�e sum af �$ {b�eu� a aminim�m of I(?°�o of Cc�ntractrn's tQta� bir� amou�at}. Tt�� fut� n�m�s azki resider�ces af aIl pers�ns �nd pmties: inte�ts�i in the fm�gr�ing �id ar� as folia�s: {If e�r�ti�a, 8ive t� n+ame.s a�vd ac� +�s c�f the Presideni a�td ;�Y�etary. If frrsn or partrlerstu�, i% names aml a�Z+esses t�f the members or �. The Biti�r s�li lisi not only his re�me:b�tfi atsc� �� name of any pers�a with wt�cam bidd�r has �u�y ty� �rf agx+e�mEnt wltereby such pe�on"s. irn�xov�e�t�, enric�craent, e�npiayrr��nt or passiiale b�►ein, wt�ether s�t�ntr�t�r, materiaLmaz�, ag�nt, suP�lier, oar emgloyer is cont�ingent upon th� awatd of t� c�ntract t� the bidd�r). NA�. ,#�. r: . _ � . < � rr - � SignaEure of Bidder: ^ 2 . �� c�r�t�rati� (T�t bidde� �uu�t indicat�e wh�r �c�rporation, Parmership, Comp�nny or Iztc�ivic�ualj. Se�tianV.d� Pagt i i af 14 7!Z!�2i31:? r_� � � PRf}PU�AL , (�� ' 'I"�e peasan si�;ning s�atl, u� his ov�n ha�iwriting, sAgn the Prin�i�'s rrame, his awn ana�ne ar�d his tit�e. '�� tt� per�on si�in� for a corporation is other th�n the Pr�d�nt c�r Vice-President, he m�, bv ' �€i�vii, �c�w his a "ty, io bir�ti the ca `c�n. p'ri�i�l; �. {�.' i �.,, � � �... � � �,...: - �; t2 � # �� C ..: , � g �� T'Ytle: �"' �� ' � i � �" >..-._? � �'' ~� " � , ' Bvsiness Adciress of H��dtier: �� . ��d ��: �ii�y a�►d 3ta#�e: �`a��a, �� ip �Code �� ' D�te�i at, '�# fl;i�ar� , this 1�t� sf�y` c�f' €��a�� , A..�}.� 2d11 � � lJ � t r i � 1 �tccionV.doe , PagG #2 ot i4 ?�� CI'I`l� C3F �LEARW,��„R ��„pTi� ��T PROJECT: FIER � CONCESSII'�i�? BIIILIyiNG STQRAGE �!I?i?TION P�2OJFCi` 1�t). Q8-f1tl64-P�'L-� Acknawledgjtrient is here�sy made of the fol�wing adde�a received �ince iss!�nce ctf Fl�as �ud Speci�icatior�. �l�ium hia. � Date: �i��r�� Addend�n i�+io. � Uat�: � G?1 � �� Adde�tdtam Nn. � Dat�: � ��1 �J2�� t�ddend�aml�I�. Datt�o Atidernie�m I��. II�te: A�dtun �+To. Date: Aad�der�dtun I`it�, Date: �dde�dum I�1�. Date: Addcnduuza I�T�. Uate• Adcienduam 1'�c�. 13ate: Adde�ium Nc�. Date: ��rt�� a�Eld��ss &�c. �i�tne c�f �idd�} �.- �-- ��.� � . {S' te�e ef �c�r� �'re��d�r�� (Titte of Officer} 1 �!�'i �at`1 � �� Stct'soaV.dac Pago 13 of 15 712+at'2f}1'2 ' � � BTDDER'S P�CMPUSAL PR�CT: FiF� 6t! CUNCESS�t�►N BLT�LDING ST�RAG� AIIDITi4NS P`R{�3ECT #. 08�-PR -+C � �� UNTT TOT�iL Ccs�t+�r W provirl� �. l�Or. aq�uptnt�t and Mu�terials €or ih� Scc�pe c�f � Goas�s�i�m�i�uildiag Stt�ragc A�s as spCCif�d ia�the consts�io�n d��tents. � t. irtsur'anc�, labor, �9��nt 8c.matatiais to,c.o�t�ct stc�raga ad�iA�on i,. S. � ' ' ' � 2. ict� G� �f linc 1 3. Tc�at �f line t& 2{10%n oa�cy) �� , i �� g � �� ,�./ �', �1 � � .L�,�� i. �� VEi:ITTBN TQTAL ArMO[TI�ET II�tCLUItES LiNE ITEi4�S ldc �{141*#. G��+�"1"II�iGENCY*) �t-t ;� �+ e,a.� � t��" i,;' �� °' � � � "" F� t: .s � � �t»` � ; ".�' "�' ��! ,�'t^�s � t'? �.,. �. �.�,.� C(iMPANY'BNAM�: ��it�.i5 �iis#dei�< #��.„ AI?I�RESS: �� , t,(tid��tl�r�� A�rC. �iTY� ��t'�p� ., �c�: ��6�fi '�'ae�rsc�: 81�-�€4�-�9�C? ��uc. 813-�8�-il�� c��4r��t�r �siu�bu,tders.c��i PRiiti'i'%D l+tkillff: ��`�9d �t��,�r _ S�Ii: ' � �-�~"� TI�; �R"��E��tt I1rATE: "341�1 ��1 � � 10°'/a et�g�cy sh�il ba t�ii� �niy upou wsittm request by thc camtrsctor for addatian�al scc�pa af w�srlc c�ot incivded �n tho b�lt of qusutities to tha C►ws�, wtitt�n appa'oval hy �a C�v�er t'or t�e ackiitio�l scopo of wcs�c in tha utiiiaa�o� �f' �C 1 i� �nt.i��+��+, �Ery fwyds n�i +�ii�ed sha�1 be rzit�rncd to th� �wurr upcm cic�se out ut'tha gctr�2� �der s�or�. 'i`i� BCU�E�it'� TLl'I`�, �� i� �'�`�`�►%. i�[iS �;+�� +CiD� �S tl�t"1" l'RI+� �i i.L� �iT� ��.� A.��i�' � A'iA'i"�� C�EJ.rlt�l"i`I"i"I`E� ��1�1�. T� �!Gi�i't� ��ii i1NFt��'�"IQ��i i�t�iL� Ai' 'TH�' `�� 41? �iPi�1�i+G Biil�. T�B C€1'Y' �.C.1�'Y.�li� 'i� 'I'�►BU%.�!�'T'�ClI� FR�CJ►M �[rl�+i�'i' �1iiC� Al'�CU Li.iMi" S��,fM �AIC� BID. IF T'E�� i�s A� �C1R El�i'iiiE 't`QTAL BY THL� B�ER, IT' Si�IALL BE �CHANGED AS t?NLY THE �1NtT PR[CL�S A�1D L�i°` S� �liiCE SHALL f,�V�RN. TE� OWI�ii R�SER� TBE RIGHf T`f3 SELE!� ANY ifEMS At� UR ' REJECT ALL BIDS� TI� TUTAL PRI� SE�Ai.L BE BASED �N iTEM3 S�L.EGTID BY '� OW�ER [�? TK[� �"RQ.�G7'. ' � � ' See2ianV.do� ' Page 14 of I S �l2�i2